Volvo 2014 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

User Manual: Volvo 2014 XC60 Owner's Manual 2014 Volvo XC60 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 390 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
Introduction
Safety
Locks and alarm
Your driving environment
Driver support
Comfort and driving pleasure
Infotainment
During your trip
Wheels and tires
Maintenance and specifications
Specifications

Owner's Manual

XC60

WEB EDITION

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.

We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe

driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed

with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour-

age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment

descriptions and operating instructions in this

manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear

seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.

And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if

you may be affected by alcohol, medication or

any impairment that could hinder your ability to

drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed-

eral safety and emission standards. If you have

any questions regarding your vehicle, please con-

tact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Con-

tacting Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction"

chapter for information on getting in touch with

Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents
2* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 6
Environment.............................................. 12
Important warnings................................... 13
01
01 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Reporting safety defects........................... 17
Seat belts ................................................. 18
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21
Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 26
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 32
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33
Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ......... 35
Crash mode.............................................. 36
Child safety............................................... 38
Child restraint systems............................. 41
Infant seats............................................... 43
Convertible seats...................................... 45
Booster cushions...................................... 47
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 48
Top tether anchors.................................... 50
Integrated booster cushion*...................... 51
Child safety locks...................................... 54
02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade....................... 58
Keyless drive............................................. 67
Locks........................................................ 70
Alarm......................................................... 73

Contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 78
Ignition modes.......................................... 88
Seats......................................................... 90
Steering wheel.......................................... 97
Lighting..................................................... 99
Wipers and washers............................... 107
Windows................................................. 110
Mirrors..................................................... 112
Digial compass*...................................... 115
Laminated panoramic roof*.................... 117
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 120
Starting the engine.................................. 123
Transmission........................................... 128
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*................ 132
Brakes..................................................... 134
Parking brake.......................................... 137
04
04 Driver support
Stability system....................................... 142
Road sign information (RSI)* .................. 145
Cruise control.......................................... 147
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 149
Distance Alert* ....................................... 160
City Safety™ .......................................... 163
Collision warning with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian Detection*...................... 169
Driver Alert System* ............................... 177
Park assist*............................................. 183
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 187
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* .. 191
05
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Volvo Sensus.......................................... 198
Menus and messages............................. 199
The MY CAR menus............................... 201
Climate system....................................... 207
Trip computer......................................... 216
Active chassis system–Four C*............... 223
Passenger compartment convenience... 224

Contents
4* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Infotainment
Introduction............................................. 230
Radio....................................................... 240
Media player........................................... 249
AUX/USB sockets................................... 254
Bluetooth® media ................................... 257
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ 259
Cell phone voice control*........................ 268
07
07 During your trip
Driving recommendations....................... 274
Refueling................................................. 278
Loading................................................... 283
Cargo area ............................................. 287
Towing a trailer....................................... 290
Emergency towing.................................. 293
08
08 Wheels and tires
General information ............................... 298
Tire inflation............................................. 301
Inflation pressure ................................... 303
Tire designations .................................... 304
Glossary of tire terminology ................... 306
Vehicle loading ....................................... 307
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................. 309
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 310
Temporary Spare ................................... 311
Tire Sealing System*............................... 312
Changing a wheel .................................. 318
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 322

Contents
5
09
09 Maintenance and
specifications
Volvo maintenance.................................. 328
Maintaining your car............................... 329
Hood and engine compartment.............. 331
Engine oil................................................ 332
Fluids...................................................... 334
Replacing bulbs...................................... 336
Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 343
Battery..................................................... 346
Fuses...................................................... 350
Vehicle care............................................. 359
10
10 Specifications
Label information.................................... 366
Specifications......................................... 368
Overview of information and warning
symbols................................................... 374
Volvo programs....................................... 377
11
11 Index
Index....................................................... 378

Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

About this manual

•Before you operate your vehicle for the

first time, please familiarize yourself with

the information found in the chapters

"Your Driving Environment" and "During

Your Trip."

•Information contained in the balance of

the manual is extremely useful and should

be read after operating the vehicle for the

first time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it

should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-

tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of

the page. This information supplements the

text that the footnote number refers to (a let-

ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a

table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field

of vision that show messages generated by

various systems and functions in the vehicle.

These texts are indicated in the Owner’s

Manual by being in slightly larger type than

the surrounding text and are printed in gray,

(for example: Change doors unlock

setting).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehi-

cle whose purpose is to provide important

information in a clear and concise way. The

importance of these decals is explained as

follows, in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black back-

ground. Decals of this type are used to indi-

cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of

this type could result in serious injury or

death.

Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space

for a message. If the information on decals of

this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle

could result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide gen-

eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual

are examples only and are not intended to

be reproductions of the decals actually

used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give

an indication of how they look and their

approximate location in the vehicle. The

applicable information for your particular

vehicle can be found on the respective

decals in the vehicle.

Types of lists used in the manual

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or

actions that must be carried out in a certain

order, are arranged in numbered lists in this

manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associ-

ated with step-by-step instructions, each

step in the procedure is numbered in the

same way as the corresponding illustra-

tion.

Lists in which letters are used can be

found with series of illustrations in cases

where the order in which the instructions

are carried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used

to indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-

cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure

are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in general overview illustrations in which

certain components are pointed out. The

corresponding number is also used in the

position list's description of the various

components.

Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information

that can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continued

} }This symbol can be found at the lower

right corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand)

page to indicate that the current topic is con-

tinued on the following page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described

in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional

information.

NOTE

•All information, illustrations and speci-

fications contained in this manual are

based on the latest product informa-

tion available at the time of publica-

tion.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change

specifications or design without notice

and without incurring obligation.

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and emission

control requirements. In some cases it

may be difficult or impossible to com-

ply with these requirements. Modifica-

tions to the emission control system(s)

may render your Volvo not certifiable

for legal operation in the U.S., Canada

and other countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability

and safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects

or other reproductive harm. In addition,

certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear con-

tain or emit chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer, and birth

defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec-

tor is locked in the P (Park) position. To

release the selector from this position, the

ignition must be in mode II (see page 88) or

the engine must be running. Depress the

brake pedal, press the button on the front

side of the gear selector and move the selec-

tor from P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system performs a brief self-diag-

nostic test when the engine has been started

and driver releases the brake pedal. Another

automatic test may be performed when the

vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate

several times and a sound may be audible

from the ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel

(see the illustration on page 280) when the

vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler

door. It will relock when closed and there will

be an audible click.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-

sion requirements. In some cases it may

be difficult or impossible to comply with

these requirements. Modifications to the

emission control system(s) may render

your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-

tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-

tries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based

on the latest product information availa-

ble at the time of publication. Please note

that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal

requirements. Optional equipment descri-

bed in this manual may not be available in

all markets.

•Some of the illustrations shown are

generic and may not depict the exact

model for which this manual is intended.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change speci-

fications or design without notice and

without incurring obligation.

Crash event data

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle's systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

Introduction

Important information

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a

number of computers whose task is to con-

tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’s

operation. They can also register information

during normal driving conditions if they detect

a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and

functionality. Some of the stored information

is required by technicians when carrying out

service and maintenance to enable them to

diagnose and rectify any faults that have

occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to

fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.

This information may be stored in the vehi-

cle’s computers for a certain period of time.

Volvo will not contribute to spreading the

above-mentioned information to third parties

without the consent of the vehicle’s owner.

However, due to national legal requirements

and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to

provide information of this type to authorities

such as law enforcement agencies or others

who may assert a legal right to obtain such

information.

Volvo and service and repair facilities with

agreements with Volvo have access to the

special technical equipment required in order

to read and interpret the information stored

by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi-

ble for ensuring that the information transmit-

ted to Volvo during service and maintenance

is stored and handled in a secure manner and

that this handling is done in accordance with

applicable legal requirements. For additional

information, contact:

For additional information, contact:

In the United States

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo has always been and continues to be a

leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers

and manufactures vehicles designed to help

protect vehicle occupants in the event of a

collision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of

a collision. This energy absorption system

including, but not limited to, structural com-

ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars,

bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails,

fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body

panels must work together to maintain cabin

integrity and protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system including

but not limited to air bags, side curtain air

bags, and deployment sensors work together

with the above components to provide proper

timing for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer-

ica does not support the use of aftermarket,

alternative or anything other than original

Volvo parts for collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use or

re-use of structural components from an

existing vehicle that has been previously

damaged. Although these parts may appear

equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have

been previously replaced with non-OE parts

or if the part has been damaged as a result of

Introduction

Important information

a prior collision. The quality of these used

parts may also have been affected due to

environmental exposure.

Information on the Internet

Additional information about your vehicle is

available at www.volvocars.com.

In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is

necessary, which is available as an app for a

number of different cell phones and can be

downloaded from the App Store or Google

Play.

QR code

Open Source Software Notice

This product uses certain free / open source

and other software originating from third

parties, that is subject to the GNU General

Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/

GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License

version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project

License (“FreeType License”) and other

different and/or additional copyright licenses,

disclaimers and notices. The links how to

access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,

LGPLv3, and the other open source software

licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and

notices are provided to you below. Please

refer to the exact terms of the relevant

License, regarding your rights under said

licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers

to provide the source code of said free/open

source software to you for a charge covering

the cost of performing such distribution, such

as the cost of media, shipping and handling,

upon written request. Please contact your

nearest Volvo retailer.

This offer is valid for a period of at least three

(3) years from the date of the distribution of

this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC

offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software

copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The

FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights

reserved.

This product includes software under

following licenses:

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/gpl-2.0.html

•Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista

2.6.31 kernel and kernel from

L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)

•uBoot (based on v2009.08)

•busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http://

www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

•libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/

lgpl.html

•Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http://

www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

•libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its

customers. As a natural part of this commit-

ment, we care about the environment in

which we all live. Caring for the environment

means an everyday involvement in reducing

our environmental impact. Volvo's environ-

mental activities are based on a holistic view,

which means we consider the overall environ-

mental impact of a product throughout its

complete life cycle. In this context, design,

production, product use, and recycling are all

important considerations. In production,

Volvo has partly or completely phased out

several chemicals including CFCs, lead chro-

mates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced

the number of chemicals used in our

plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce

into production a three-way catalytic con-

verter with a Lambda sond, now called the

heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current

version of this highly efficient system reduces

emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC,

NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately

95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the

remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the

only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-

free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system

of all models as far back as the 1975

model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-

trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer

to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-

mental refinement of conventional gasoline-

powered internal combustion engines, Volvo

is actively looking at advanced technology

alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our

partner in the work to lessen the car's impact

on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-

sible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for

inspection if the check engine (malfunc-

tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays

on after the vehicle has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used bat-

teries, brake pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All

Volvo car care products are formulated to

be environmentally friendly.

FSC®

The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®)

symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in

this publication comes from FSC® certified

forests and other responsible sources.

Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and

others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac-

tions is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities

that are not directly related to controlling the

vehicle in the driving environment. Your new

Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-

ture-rich entertainment and communication

systems. These include hands-free cellular

telephones, navigation systems, and multi-

purpose audio systems. You may also own

other portable electronic devices for your own

convenience. When used properly and safely,

they enrich the driving experience. Improperly

used, any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide

the following warning that reflects the strong

Volvo concern for your safety. Never use

these devices or any feature of your vehicle in

a way that distracts you from the task of driv-

ing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious

accident. In addition to this general warning,

we offer the following guidance regarding

specific newer features that may be found in

your vehicle:

•Never use a hand-held cellular telephone

while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while

the vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system, set and make changes to

your travel itinerary only with the vehicle

parked.

•Never program your audio system while

the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-

sets with the vehicle parked, and use

your programmed presets to make radio

use quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or per-

sonal digital assistants while the vehicle is

moving.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo own-

ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved

accessories, and that accessory installa-

tions be performed only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the perform-

ance, safety, and emission systems in

your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician knows

where accessories may and may not be

safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases,

please consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician before installing

any accessory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

Additionally, an inexperienced installer

may not be familiar with some of your

car's systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if

you install accessories that Volvo has not

tested, or if you allow accessories to be

installed by someone unfamiliar with your

vehicle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-

genuine accessories.

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16
Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 17
Seat belts ............................................................................................... 18
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 21
Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 26
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 30
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 32
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... 33
Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ....................................................... 35
Crash mode............................................................................................ 36
Child safety............................................................................................. 38
Child restraint systems........................................................................... 41
Infant seats.............................................................................................. 43
Convertible seats.................................................................................... 45
Booster cushions.................................................................................... 47
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 48
Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 50
Integrated booster cushion*.................................................................... 51
Child safety locks.................................................................................... 54

SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern

dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled

off the production line. Three-point seat belts

(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-

absorbing impact zones were designed into

Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable

or required by government regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment to

safety. We continue to seek out new safety

features and to refine those already in our

vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate

hearing your suggestions about improving

automobile safety. We also want to know if

you ever have a safety concern with your

vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:

1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:

1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•How well you see.

•Your ability to concentrate.

•How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to

help you cope with the ever changing traffic

environment.

•Never drink and drive.

•If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•Take a driver-retraining course.

•Have your eyes checked regularly.

•Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

•Never send text messages while driving.

•Refrain from using or minimize the use of

a cell phone while driving.

Recall information

Information regarding recalls or other service

campaigns is available on our website at

www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab

YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL

INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower

left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle

Identification Number for your vehicle (found

at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle

has any open Recalls, they will be displayed

on this page.

Volvo customers in Canada

For any questions regarding open recalls for

your vehicle, please contact your authorized

Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to

answer your questions, please contact Volvo

Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon-

day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.

EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com.

You may also write us at:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

01 Safety

Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying Volvo Cars of North

America, LLC. If NHTSA receives

similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individ-

ual problems between you, your

retailer, or Volvo Cars of North

America, LLC. To contact NHTSA,

you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-

portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from:

http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that if

your vehicle is covered under a

service campaign, safety or emis-

sion recall or similar action, it should

be completed as soon as possible.

Please check with your local retailer

or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

if your vehicle is covered under

these conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT

(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that

could cause a crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo

Cars of Canada Corp.

Transport Canada can be contacted at:

1-800-333-0510

Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500

Fax: 1-819-994-3372

Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road

Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z

0A1

01 Safety

Seat belts

General information

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants of your vehicle. Children should be

properly restrained, using an infant, car, or

booster seat determined by age, weight and

height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where the

front or side impact airbags deploy, and in

certain impacts from the rear. The front seat

belts also include a tension reducing device

which, in the event of a collision, limits the

peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the

occupant.

Fastening a seat belt

Buckling

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click

is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provi-

ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out

too far.

Seat belt retractor

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the

following situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is

activated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)

is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,

which is designed to help keep the seat

belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt

is pulled out as far as possible. If this is

done, a sound from the seat belt retractor

will be audible, which is normal, and the

seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in

place. This function is automatically disa-

bled when the seat belt is unbuckled and

fully retracted.

See also 216 and 278 for additional

information.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousands

of revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currently

selected gear

Theme Eco: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a

white marking, a yellow indicator light will

illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See

also 216 and 278 for additional informa-

tion.

Eco Guide (see page 132)

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousands

of revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currently

selected gear

Theme Performance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a

white marking, a yellow indicator light will

illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See

also 216 and 278 for additional informa-

tion.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (shows engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute

(rpm))

Power Meter (see page 132).

Gear indicator: Shows the currently

selected gear

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru-

ment panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument

panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up in

ignition mode II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is

disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function

check is carried out in ignition mode II, all

symbols go out after 5 seconds except the

malfunction indicator light, which may indi-

cate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system,

and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Some of the symbols shown may not be

available in all markets or models.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active Bending

Light (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog lights on

Stability system

The stability system's Sport

mode is activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read the

text displayed in the instrument

panel

High beam indicator

Symbol Description

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

Tire pressure monitoring sensor

(TPMS)A

AOption in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light

(ABL) system

This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in

the ABL system. See page 102 for more

information about this system.

Malfunction Indicator Light

As you drive, a computer called On-Board

Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's

engine, transmission, electrical and emission

systems.

The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if

the computer senses a condition that poten-

tially may need correcting. When this hap-

pens, please have your vehicle checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

as soon as possible.

A malfunction indicator light may have many

causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

change in your car's behavior. Even so, an

uncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ-

omy, emission controls, and drivability.

Extended driving without correcting the cause

could even damage other components in

your vehicle.

This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is

not closed tightly or if the engine was running

while the vehicle was refueled.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

If the warning light comes on, there may be a

malfunction in the ABS system (the standard

braking system will still function). Check the

system by:

1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off

the ignition.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning light goes off, no further

action is required.

If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle

should be driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection, see

page 134 for additional information.

Rear fog lights

This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights

are on.

Stability system

This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-

tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehi-

cle, see page 142 for more detailed informa-

tion.

Sport mode

This symbol illuminates to indicate that the

stability system's Sport mode has been acti-

vated to help provide maximum tractive force,

for example when driving with snow chains,

or driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Low fuel level

When this light comes on, the vehicle should

be refueled as soon as possible. See page

278 for information about fuel and refueling.

Information symbol

The information symbol lights up and a text

message is displayed to provide the driver

with necessary information about one of the

vehicle's systems. The message can be

erased and the symbol can be turned off by

pressing the OK button (see page 199 for

information) or this will take place automati-

cally after a short time (the length of time var-

ies, depending on the function affected).

The information symbol may also illuminate

together with other symbols.

High beam indicator

This symbol illuminates when the high beam

headlights are on, or if the high beam flash

function is used.

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

NOTE

•Both turn signal indicators will flash

when the hazard warning flashers are

used.

•If either of these indicators flash faster

than normal, the direction indicators

are not functioning properly.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)*

This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire

pressure in one or more tires is low, see

page 322 for detailed information.

Warning symbols

Symbol Description

Low oil pressure

Parking brake applied

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol, read the text

displayed in the instrument

panel

Low oil pressure

If the light comes on while driving, stop the

vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and

check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-

sary. If the oil level is normal and the light

stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed

to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Parking brake applied

This symbol flashes while the brake is being

applied and then glows steadily when the

parking brake has been set.

See page 137 for more information about

using the parking brake.

Airbags – SRS

If this light comes on while the vehicle is

being driven, or remains on for longer than

approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle

has been started, the SRS system's diagnos-

tic functions have detected a fault in a seat

belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side

impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.

Have the system(s) inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician as

soon as possible.

See page 21 for more information about the

airbag system.

Seat belt reminder

This symbol comes on for approximately

6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or

her seat belt.

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Contact

an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil or

coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high

heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.

Engine overheating will be signaled with text

and a red warning triangle in the middle of the

instrument display. The exact text will depend

on the degree of overheating. It may range

from High engine temp Reduce speed to

High engine temp Stop engine. If appropri-

ate, other messages, such as Coolant level

low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If

your engine does overheat so that you must

stop the engine, always allow the engine to

cool before attempting to check oil and cool-

ant levels.

See page 334 for more information.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may

be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reser-

voir, see page 334. If the level in the reservoir

is below MIN, the vehicle should be transpor-

ted to an authorized Volvo workshop to have

the brake system checked.

If the and symbols come on

at the same time, there may be a fault in the

brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn

off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-

ing.

•If the symbols remain on, check the level

in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 334.

If the brake fluid level is normal but the

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be

driven, with great care, to an authorized

Volvo workshop to have the brake system

checked.

•If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,

the vehicle should be transported to an

authorized Volvo workshop to have the

brake system checked.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a warning mes-

sage is displayed in the text window:

DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•If the and symbols

are on at the same time, there is a risk

of reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to indicate

a problem related to safety and/or drivability.

A message will also appear in the instrument

panel. The symbol remains visible until the

fault has been rectified but the text message

can be cleared with the OK button, see

page 199. The warning symbol can also

come on in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the

vehicle further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display.

Clear the message using OK.

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors is not closed properly, the

information or warning symbol illuminates

(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic

will be displayed in instrument panel and an

explanatory text message2 will also be dis-

played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place as soon as possible and

close the door.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

lower than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the information symbol illu-

minates.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

higher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-

nates.

If the hood is not closed properly, the warn-

ing symbol illuminates, a graphic will be dis-

played in instrument panel and an explana-

tory text message2 will also be displayed in

the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place as soon as possible and close the

hood.

If the tailgate is not closed properly, the

information symbol illuminates, a graphic will

be displayed in instrument panel and an

explanatory text message2 will also be dis-

played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place as soon as possible and

close the tailgate.

2Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Ambient temperature sensor

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A:

digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument

panel

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is between

23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake

symbol will be displayed next to the tem-

perature. This symbol serves as a warning

for possible slippery road surfaces. Please

note that this symbol does not indicate a

fault with your vehicle.

At low speeds or when the vehicle is not

moving, the temperature readings may be

slightly higher than the actual ambient

temperature.

Trip odometers

Trip odometer3

Odometer display

The trip odometers T1 and T2 are used to

measure short distances. The distance is

shown in the display.

Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering

wheel lever to display the desired trip odome-

ter.

Press and hold the RESET button on the left

steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to

reset the selected trip odometer4.

3The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels

4Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

Clock

Clock, digital instrument panel*

Display5

Setting the clock

The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu

system. See page 201 for additional informa-

tion about these menus.

1. Go to Settings System options

Time.

2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK

to activate this box.

3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and

press OK to confirm the setting and

deactivate this box.

4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A)

and press OK to activate this box (B).

5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and

press OK to confirm the setting and

deactivate this box.

6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to

complete the procedure.

Use the menu selection Settings System

options Time format to display the time in

the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format

(AM/PM).

5Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel

03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Inserting and removing the remote

key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key1

Holding the end of the remote key with the

base of the key blade, insert the remote key

into the ignition slot as shown in the illustra-

tion and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot can

impair function or cause damage.

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the

ignition slot by pulling it out.

Functions

The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that

can be used without starting the engine. The

following table shows examples of which

functions are available in the respective

modes.

NOTE

To access ignition modes I or II without

starting the engine, the brake pedal must

not be depressed.

Mode Function

0The odometer, clock and tem-

perature gauge are illuminated.

Power seats* can be adjusted

and the infotainment system can

be used for a limited time (to min-

imize battery drain see

page 230).

IThe laminated panoramic roof,

power windows,12-volt sockets

in the passenger compartment,

navigation system*, climate sys-

tem blower, windshield wipers

can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illumi-

nate. Warning/indicator lights illu-

minate for 5 seconds. Other sys-

tems are activated. However, the

heated seats* and heated rear

window function can only be acti-

vated when the engine is running.

Mode II should only be used for

very short periods to help avoid

draining the battery.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Ignition mode 0

–The vehicle is unlocked.

Ignition mode I

–With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II

–With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0

To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press

START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine

See page 123 for information on starting the

engine and switching it off.

Emergency towing

See page 294 for important information

about the remote key when the vehicle is

being towed.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front seats

Lumbar support: turn the control for

firmer or softer lumbar support.

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and

move the seat to the position of your

choice.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the

angle of the backrest.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

•Do not adjust the seat while driving.

The seat should be adjusted so that

the brake pedal can be depressed

fully. In addition, position the seat as

far rearward as comfort and control

allow.

•Check that the seat is securely locked

into position after adjusting.

Folding the front seat backrest*1

The front passenger seat backrest can be

folded to a horizontal position to make room

for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down as

possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back-

rest.

Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possible

so that the head restraint slides under the

glove compartment.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help pre-

vent injury to occupants. Secure the

load to help prevent shifting during

sudden stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned

to the upright position, push and pull it

to be sure that it is securely locked in

this position.

1The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat2

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/rearward and up/down

Backrest tilt

Operation

The seats can be adjusted for a short period

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat

adjustment is normally made when the igni-

tion is on and can always be made when the

engine is running.

NOTE

•Only one of the power seat's controls

can be used at the same time.

•The power seats have an overload

protector that activates if a seat is

blocked by any object. If this occurs,

switch off the ignition (key in posi-

tion 0) and wait for a short period

before operating the seat again.

Power seat memory function

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

Programming the seat's memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-

tions can be stored in the driver seat's mem-

ory.

The following example explains how button

(1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3)

are programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirror

position in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the

desired positions using the seat and mir-

ror adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the M (memory)

button (4).

3. With the memory button depressed,

press button (1) briefly to store the cur-

rent position for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the posi-

tion that they were in when a button was

programmed:

–Press and hold down button (1) until the

seat and mirrors stop moving.

2Optional on certain models

03 Your driving environment

Seats

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop

automatically if the button is released

before the seat has reached the preset

position.

Remote key memory and the power

driver's seat* and door mirrors3

Each remote key has a feature that enables it

to store (remember) the position of the power

driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi-

cle is locked with that remote key.

This feature has to be activated for each of

the remote keys used in the vehicle as fol-

lows:

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to

Settings Car settings Car key

memory

3. To activate the remote key memory fea-

ture, press ENTER (check the box).

> The remote key is now ready to store

the position of the power driver's seat

and door mirrors.

Repeat this procedure for each of the vehi-

cle's remote keys.

See page 201 for a description of the menu

system.

Storing the positions of the power

driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key

1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the

desired position using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with

the remote key (or close the driver's door

and press the lock button on the door

handle with the remote key in your pos-

session on vehicles with the optional key-

less drive).

> The positions of the power driver's

seat and door mirrors are now stored

in the remote key's memory.

NOTE

The remote key's memory feature and the

power driver's seat memory function (the

settings made using the buttons on the

side of the seat, see the section "Power

seat memory function" on page 91) work

independently of each other.

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored

positions

To move the seat and door mirrors to the

position stored in the remote key:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote key (the one used to lock the

doors). For models equipped with the

optional keyless drive, you must have the

same remote key in your possession.

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-

matically move to the position in which you

left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked

with one of the other keys and new seat/

mirror adjustments have been made).

3This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

NOTE

•The seat will move to this position

even if someone else has moved it to a

different position and locked the vehi-

cle with a different remote key.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote keys that you

use with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be

adjusted with the ignition off, children

should never be left unattended in the

vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOP-

PED at any time by pressing any but-

ton on the power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving.

The seat should be adjusted so that

the brake pedal can be depressed

fully. In addition, position the seat as

far rearward as comfort and control

allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is

in motion.

Heated seats*

See page 211.

Rear seats

Rear center head restraint

The center head restraint should be adjusted

according to the passenger's height. The

restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-

port the occupant's head.

•Pull the head restraint up as required.

•To lower, press and hold the button

(located at the center, between the back-

rest and the head restraint) while pressing

the head restrain down carefully.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this

seat is NOT occupied. When the center

position is occupied, the head restraint

should be correctly adjusted to the pas-

senger’s height. The upper edge of the

head restraint should be at least on a level

with the upper-most point of the seat

occupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat's

outboard head restraints

•Pull the handle closest to the head

restraint to fold it down.

•To return the head restraint to the upright

position, push it up until it clicks into

place.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot

be folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be

kept folded down for prolonged periods.

This could result in pressure marks in

leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat

positions if the head restraints are folded

down. If these positions are occupied, the

head restraints should be in the upright

(fixed) position.

Automatically folding down the rear

seat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear head

restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot

be folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be

kept folded down for prolonged periods.

This could result in pressure marks in

leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat

positions if the head restraints are folded

down. If these positions are occupied, the

head restraints should be in the upright

(fixed) position.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The three sections of the rear seat backrest

can be folded down in different combinations

to make it easier to transport long objects.

•The left (driver's side) section can be

folded down separately.

•The center section can be folded down

separately.

•The right (passenger's side) section can

only be folded down together with the

center section.

•All three sections can be folded down

together.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,

there should be no objects on the rear seat

and the seat belt should not be buckled

when the backrest is folded down.

Release and lower the center head

restraint (see page 93) if the center and/or

right section of the backrest is to be low-

ered. The outboard head restraints fold

down automatically.

Pull up the backrest release control on

the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the

section(s) down. A red indicator ( )

shows that the backrest is not locked in

the upright position.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the front

seats forward or put their backrests in a

more upright position before folding down

the rear seat backrests.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the

backrest is returned to the upright

position, check that it is properly

locked in place by pushing and pulling

it. The red indicators should also not

be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the

event of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply

the parking brake when loading/

unloading the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure of people to these high tem-

peratures for even a short period of

time can cause heat-related injury or

death. Small children are particularly at

risk.

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering

wheel

Possible positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to

push into place, press the steering wheel

lightly at the same time as you push the

lever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing.

With the optional speed-dependent power

steering the level of steering force can be

adjusted, see page 223.

Keypads and steering wheel paddles*

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*

Cruise control, see page 147. Adaptive

cruise control*, see page 149.

Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear-

tronic), see page 129.

Infotainment system controls, see

page 231.

Horn

–Press the steering wheel hub to sound

the horn.

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electrically heated* steering wheel

Button for steering wheel heating

With the ignition in at least mode I (see page

89 for information about the ignition modes),

press this button once to begin warming the

steering wheel (press again to switch off). The

indicator light in the button will illuminate

when the function is active.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel

Lighting panel overview

Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru-

ment and "theater" lighting (see

page 102)

Rear fog lights (see page 103)

Headlight switch

Volvo recommends using the posi-

tion whenever possible.

Headlight switch positions

Daytime running lights function as follows:

With the headlight switch in the

position:

•In the US: the daytime running lights will

be off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will

be on

With the headlight switch in the 1

position and the ignition in mode II or if the

engine is running (see page 89)

•In the US: the daytime running lights will

be off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will

be on

With the headlight switch in the

position:

•The daytime running lights will be on (the

low beam headlights will automatically

switch on in dark conditions)

US models only: The daytime running lights

in mode can be switched on or off in

the MY CAR menu system under Settings

Car settings Light settings Daytime

running lights.

NOTE

The use of daytime running lights is rec-

ommended in the United States and is

mandatory in Canada.

With the headlight switch in the

position:

•The daytime running lights will be off and

the low beam headlights will be on

1The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

High/low beam headlights

Headlight switch and steering wheel lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Low beam headlights

When the engine is started, the low beams

are activated automatically if the headlight

control is in position .

Continuous high beam headlights

With the headlight switch in the (in

dark conditions only, when the daytime run-

ning lights have automatically switched off

and the low beam headlights have switched

on) or position:

•Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 2 and release it to toggle

between low and high beams.

High beam flash

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 1. The high beams come on until the

lever is released.

Active high beams – AHB*

AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the

upper edge of the windshield to detect the

headlights of oncoming vehicles or the tail-

lights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this

happens, the headlights will automatically

switch from high beams to low beams. When

the camera no longer detects the headlights/

taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will

switch back to high beams after several sec-

onds.

To activate AHB:

•Turn the headlight control to the

position.

The feature will begin functioning if the engine

has been running for at least 20 seconds and

the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph

(20 km/h).

Headlight switch in the AUTO position

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer-

ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steering

wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If

AHB is switched off while the high beams are

on, the headlights will change to low beams.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

101

Models with an analog instrument panel

When AHB is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel. The

high beam indicator ( ) in the instrument

panel will also illuminate when the high

beams are on.

Models with a digital instrument panel

When AHB is activated, will illuminate

as a white symbol in the instrument panel.

When the high beams are on, the symbol will

change to blue.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the

camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•Do not mount or in any way attach

anything on the windshield that could

obstruct the camera.

If Active high beam Temporary

unavailable Switch manually is displayed in

the instrument panel, switching between high

and low beams will have to be done man-

ually. However, the light switch can remain in

the AUTO position. The same applies if

Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed

and the symbol is displayed. The

symbol will go out when these mes-

sages are displayed.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in

heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active

again or if the sensors in the windshield are

no longer obscured, the messages will disap-

pear and the symbol will illuminate.

CAUTION

In the following situations, it may be nec-

essary to switch between high and low

beams manually:

•In heavy fog or rain

•In blowing snow or slush

•In bright moonlight

•In freezing rain

•In areas with dim street lighting

•When oncoming vehicles have dim

front lighting

•If there are pedestrians on or near the

road

•If there are reflective objects, such as

signs, near the road

•When oncoming vehicles' lights are

obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•When there are vehicles on connecting

roads

•At the top of hills or in dips in the road

•In sharp curves

See page173 for more information about the

camera's limitations.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel detection (models with the rain

sensor* only)

The rain sensor reacts to the change in light-

ing conditions when, for example, the vehicle

enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea-

ture will then activate the low beam head-

lights. The low beams will be switched off

approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves

the tunnel.

The rain sensor does not have to be activated

for tunnel detection to function.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light

function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

When this function is activated, the headlight

beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve

according to movements of the steering

wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the

illustration).

ABL is activated automatically2 when the

engine is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivated

in the MY CAR menu system under My XC60

Active Bending Lights or under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights.

See page 201 for a description of the menu

system.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or

dark conditions, and only when the vehicle

is in motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the sym-

bol will illuminate and a message will be dis-

played as shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explanation

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system is

not functioning

properly and

should be

inspected/

repaired by a

trained and

qualified Volvo

service techni-

cian.

Auxiliary lights*

If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the

driver can use the MY CAR menu system to

choose to deactivate and turn these lights on

and off along with the high beam headlights3.

Instrument and "theater" lighting

Instrument lighting

Illumination of the display and instrument

lights will vary, depending on ignition mode

(see page 88).

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the

thumb wheel.

2The factory default setting is on.

3The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 201 for more information

about the menu system.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

103

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumb wheel.

"Theater" lighting

When the overhead courtesy lighting has

gone out and the engine is running, several

LEDs located near the roof console illuminate

to provide faint lighting for the occupants of

the front seats. This lighting goes out just

after the overhead courtesy lighting when the

vehicle is locked.

Parking lights

Headlight switch in the parking light position

Turn the headlight switch to the posi-

tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

Canadian models: If the ignition is in position

II or the engine is running, the daytime run-

ning lights will also be on.

With the headlight switch in this position, the

parking lights will remain on even when the

ignition is switched off.

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear

parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate

is opened to alert anyone traveling behind

your vehicle. This happens regardless of the

position that the headlight control is in or

which mode the ignition is in.

Rear fog lights

The rear fog lights will only function in combi-

nation with the high/low beam headlights.

–Press the button to switch the rear fog

lights on/off.

> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and the

light in the button illuminate when the

rear fog lights are switched on.

NOTE

The rear fog lights are considerably

brighter than the normal taillights and

should be used only when conditions such

as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce

visibility for other vehicles to less than

500 ft. (150 meters).

NOTE

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such

as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This

is normal and the lights are designed to

withstand moisture. Normally, condensa-

tion will dissipate after the lights have been

on for a short time.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

104

Hazard warning flashers

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

The hazard warning flasher should be used to

indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic

hazard.

–To activate the flashers, press the button

in the center dash. Press the button again

to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

•Regulations regarding the use of the

hazard warning flasher may vary,

depending on where you live.

•The hazard warning flashers will be

activated automatically if an airbag

deploys.

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signal

lever up or down to the first position and

releasing it.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as pos-

sible to start the turn signals. The turn signals

will be cancelled automatically by the move-

ment of the steering wheel, or the lever can

be returned to its initial position by hand.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes

faster than normal, check for a

burned-out turn signal bulb.

Interior lighting, front

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light,

on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

The lighting in the front part of the passenger

compartment is controlled with the buttons

(1) and (2) in the roof console.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passen-

ger compartment lighting:

•Off: right side depressed, automatic light-

ing off.

•Neutral position: automatic lighting is

on.

•On – left side depressed, passenger

compartment lighting on.

Interior lighting, rear

Rear reading lights

The lights are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch

on/off automatically when one of the front

doors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches

on/off automatically when the lid is opened/

closed.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and off automatically when but-

ton (3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for

30 seconds if:

•the vehicle is unlocked from the outside

with the key or remote control

•the engine is switched off and the ignition

is in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

•the engine is started

•the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two

minutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can be

switched on and off manually within

30 minutes after the vehicle has been

unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and the

vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will

switch off automatically after one minute.

Cargo area lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automati-

cally when the tailgate is opened.

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can

make use of the home safe lighting function

to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to

put the ignition in mode 0 (see page 89

for information about the ignition modes).

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

towards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,

lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,

and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain

on for 30 4, 60 or 90 seconds. The time inter-

val can be set in MY CAR under Settings

4Factory setting

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

106

Car settings Light settings Home safe

light duration. See page 201 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

Approach lighting

Approach lighting is activated by pressing the

approach light button on the remote key (see

the illustration on page 61).

When the function has been activated, the

parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror

lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting

and door step lighting come on.

The time interval for this lighting can be set

by pressing MY CAR and going to Car

settings Light settings Approach light

duration. See page 201 for a description of

the menu system.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•Before using the wipers, ice and snow

should be removed from the wind-

shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper

blades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers off

Move the lever to position 0 to

switch off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep

Move the lever upward from posi-

tion 0 to sweep the windshield one

stroke at a time for as long as the

lever is held up.

Intermittent wiping

With the lever in this position, you

can set the wiper interval by twisting

the thumb wheel upward to increase

wiper speed or downward to decrease the

speed.

Continuous wiping

The wipers operate at normal

speed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Windshield wiper service position

The windshield wipers must be in the service

position before the wiper blades can be

cleaned or replaced. See page 343 for addi-

tional information.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on

the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sen-

sor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel

up (the wipers will sweep the windshield more

frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the

windshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep each

time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle

must be running or in ignition mode II and the

windshield wiper lever must be in position 0

or in the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton . The windshield wipers will make

one sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make an

extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active

mode when the stalk is released back to

position 0.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the

button or press the lever down to

another wiper position.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition

slot or five minutes after the ignition has been

switched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated

when washing the car in an automatic car

wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left

on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the

car wash and could be damaged.

Windshield washing

Washing function

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

start the windshield and headlight washers.

After the lever is released the wipers make

several extra sweeps.

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to help prevent the washer

fluid from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,

the headlights are washed using two alterna-

tives:

•Low/high beam headlights on. The

headlights will be washed the first time

the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the

headlights will only be washed once for

every five times the windshield is washed

within a 10-minute period.

•Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-

ing Lights will be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed. Nor-

mal halogen headlights will not be

washed.

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of

washer fluid remains in the reservoir,

the headlights will no longer be

washed. A text message will also be

displayed to remind the driver to fill the

washer fluid reservoir.

Tailgate wiper/washer

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate

washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

109

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off

function, which means that it will not oper-

ate if its electric motor overheats. The

wiper will function again after a cool-down

period (30 seconds or longer, depending

on the heat of the motor and ambient tem-

perature conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the windshield wipers are on and the trans-

mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate

wiper will go into intermittent wiping func-

tion1. This function is deactivated when a dif-

ferent gear is selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,

the tailgate wiper will be activated when

reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is

activated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continu-

ous) wiping mode, selecting different gears

will not affect its function.

1Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Your driving environment

Windows

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power windows

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons,

see page 54

Rear window controls

Front window controls.

WARNING

•Always remove the ignition key when

the vehicle is unattended to put the

ignition in mode 0 (see page 89 for

information about the ignition modes).

•Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

•Make sure that the windows are com-

pletely unobstructed before they are

operated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors only operate the

window in the respective doors.

For the power windows to function, the igni-

tion must be in at least mode I. When the

vehicle has been running, the power windows

can be operated for several minutes after the

remote key has been removed from the igni-

tion slot, or until a door has been opened.

NOTE

•Movement of the windows will stop if

they are obstructed in any way.

•To reduce buffeting wind noise if the

rear windows are opened, also open

the front windows slightly.

Manual up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down

slightly.

> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down as far

as possible and release it.

> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

03 Your driving environment

Windows

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the

auto open function must be reset so that it

will work properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the but-

ton to close the window and hold it for

one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

Laminated glass*

This glass is reinforced to help pro-

vide protection against break-ins

and improved sound insulation in

the passenger compartment.

The windshield, laminated panoramic roof

and other windows have laminated glass.

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power door mirrors

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or the R button for the right door mirror.

The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

center.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear

further away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-

ing in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after approximately one

second. The mirrors automatically stop in

the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key

memory when the vehicle has been locked

with the remote key. When the vehicle is

unlocked with the same remote control the

mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored

positions when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Car key memory Personal settings in

key memory. See page 201 for a description

of the menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*

The door mirrors can be tilted down to help

give the driver a better view along the sides of

the vehicle, for example when parallel park-

ing.

To activate this function, select reverse gear

and press the L or R mirror control button to

tilt the mirror down.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt

right mirror. See page 201 for a description

of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal posi-

tion:

•after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-

gaged and the car remains stopped.

•immediately when reverse is disengaged

and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

•immediately if you press the correspond-

ing L or R button again.

•when the engine is turned off.

•when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at a

time.

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

Automatically tilting the door mirrors

when parking

The door mirrors can tilt down automatically

to help give the driver a better view along the

sides of the vehicle, for example when paral-

lel parking. When the transmission is no

longer in reverse, the mirrors will automati-

cally return to their original position.

This function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt

left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right

mirror. See page 201 for information about

the MY CAR menu system.

Automatic retraction when locking

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the

remote key the door mirrors are automatically

retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors

when locking. See page 201 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be electrically reset

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work.

•Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

•Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light on the door mirrors comes on when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see page 105.

Heated windshield*, rear window and

door mirror defrosters

Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear win-

dow and door mirror defroster (2)

Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the wind-

shield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear

window and door mirrors. The indicator lights

in the respective buttons indicate that the

function is active. Switch the function off

when then windshield/rear window/mirrors

have cleared to help avoid battery drain.The

heating function will also switch off automati-

cally after a certain amount of time.

Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door

mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the

ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C)

can be selected in MY CAR under Settings

Climate settings Automatic rear

defroster. See page 201 for a description of

the menu system.

Interior rearview mirror

Auto-dim function

The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim func-

tion is controlled by two sensors: one point-

ing forward (located on the forward-facing

side of the mirror, which monitors the amount

of ambient light) and one pointing rearward

(located on the side of the mirror facing the

driver at the upper edge, which senses the

strength of following vehicles' headlights),

and work together to help eliminate glare.1

1The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors.

03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

114

NOTE

Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,

parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the

rear sensor by loading the cargo compart-

ment or the rear seat in such a way that

light is prevented from reaching the sensor

will reduce the auto-dim function in the

interior rearview mirror and optional auto-

dim function in the door mirrors.

03 Your driving environment

Digial compass*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rear-view mirror has an integrated display

that shows the compass direction in which

the vehicle is pointing. Eight different direc-

tions are shown with the abbreviations: N

(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south-

east), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west)

and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically when

the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To

switch the compass on/off use a pen, paper-

clip or similar object and press in the button

on the underside of the mirror.

Calibration

North America is divided into 15 magnetic

zones and the compass will need to be cali-

brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one

(see the magnetic zones on the map in the

following section "Selecting a magnetic

zone"). To do so:

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area,

safely out of traffic and away from steel

structures and high-tension electrical

wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

•For best calibration results, switch off

all electrical equipment in the vehicle

(climate system, windshield wipers,

audio system, etc.) and make sure that

all doors are closed.

•Calibration may not succeed or be

incorrect if the vehicle's electrical

equipment is not switched off.

3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object,

press and hold the button on the under-

side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until

C is displayed in the mirror.

4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds

until the number of the current magnetic

zone is displayed.

5. Press the button repeatedly until the

number of the desired magnetic zone

(1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic

zones on the map in the following section

"Selecting a magnetic zone").

6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir-

ror.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direc-

tion is displayed. This indicates that cali-

bration is complete.

8. Drive around in a circle an additional two

times to fine-tune the calibration.

9. Vehicles with an electrically heated

windshield:* if C is displayed when the

heating function is activated, perform

step 7 with the heating function on. See

also page 213 for additional information

about the heated windshield.

Repeat the calibration procedure if neces-

sary.

03 Your driving environment

Digial compass*

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Selecting a magnetic zone

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the

compass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the rear side of mirror

for at least 3 seconds. The number for the

current area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the

number for the required geographic area

(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the

compass direction after several seconds.

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

Introduction

The laminated panoramic roof is divided into

two sections.

•The rear glass section is fixed in place

and cannot be moved.

•The front glass section can be slid hori-

zontally to the open or closed positions or

its rear edge can be raised and lowered

to allow ventilation.

All references in this section to opening or

closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front

glass section.

The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun

shade made of perforated fabric that is

located below the sections of glass. This

shade can be opened or closed, for example

when driving in bright sunlight.

Both the laminated panoramic roof and the

sun shade are operated by the controls in the

ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The

vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II

before the laminated panoramic roof/sun

shade can be operated.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Do not operate the laminated panor-

amic roof if it is frozen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the lami-

nated panoramic roof.

Operation

Auto open (arrow points toward the rear

of the vehicle)

Manual open

Manual close

Auto close

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•During manual closing, if the laminated

panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi-

ately open it again.

•Never open or close the laminated

panoramic roof if it is obstructed in

any way.

•Never allow a child to operate the

laminated panoramic roof.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•When leaving the vehicle, ensure that

the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 88

for information about the various igni-

tion modes) to disable the laminated

panoramic roof. Never leave the

remote key/PCC* in the vehicle.

•Never extend any object or body part

though the open laminated panoramic

roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is

completely switched off.

Automatic operation

1. To open the sun shade completely, pull

the control as far back as possible (to the

auto open position) and release it.

2. To fully open the laminated panoramic

roof, pull the control as far back as possi-

ble a second time (to the auto open posi-

tion) and release it.

Quick open/close

The laminated panoramic roof and the sun

shade can be opened/closed at the same

time:

•Open - pull the control back (to the auto

open position) twice in quick succession

and release it.

•Close - push the control forward (to the

auto close position) twice in quick suc-

cession and release it.

Manual operation

1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control

back to the first stop (the manual open

position) and hold it until the sun shade

has opened to the position of your

choice.

2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated

panoramic roof: Pull the control back to

the first stop (the manual open position) a

second time to open the rear edge of the

laminated panoramic roof.

3. Opening the front glass section: Pull

the control back to the first stop (the

manual open position) a third time and

hold it until the laminated panoramic roof

has opened to the position of your

choice.

Perform this procedure in reverse order to

close the laminated panoramic roof and/or

sun shade.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun shade must

first be fully open before it will be possible

to open the laminated panoramic roof.

When closing, the laminated panoramic

roof must be fully closed before the sun

shade can be closed.

03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

Tilt position

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the front

glass section) by pressing the rear edge

of the control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol downward and holding it until the

laminated panoramic roof has closed

completely.

If the sun shade is completely closed, it will

open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the

laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt

position.

Auto-stop

The laminated panoramic roof has an auto-

stop feature that is triggered if the glass sec-

tion of the roof or the sun shade is blocked in

any way when being closed. In this case, the

laminated panoramic roof or sun shade will

stop and reverse automatically approximately

2 in. (5 cm) from the point at which it was

blocked (or will open fully to the tilt position).

The auto-stop feature also functions when

the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is

being opened.

The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the

closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g.,

due to ice around the laminated panoramic

roof) by pressing and holding the control for-

ward/down until the roof is closed.

Wind blocker

The moonroof is equipped with a wind

blocker that folds up when the moonroof is

open.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-

vides a convenient way to replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters

used to activate devices such as gate opera-

tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,

security systems, even home lighting. Addi-

tional HomeLink information can be found on

the Internet at www.homelink.com or by

phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

WARNING

•If you use HomeLink to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near

the gate or door while it is in motion.

•When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park outside of

the garage.

•Do not use HomeLink with any garage

door opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes

any garage door opener model manu-

factured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect an

object - signaling the door to stop and

reverse - does not meet current U.S.

federal safety standards. For more

information, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF

device you are programming for use in other

vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro-

gramming. It is also suggested that upon the

sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home-

Link buttons be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” on

page 122.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition to

be switched on or be in the “accessories”

position for programming and/or operation

of HomeLink. It is also recommended that

a new battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink for quicker training

and accurate transmission of the radio-fre-

quency signal. The HomeLink buttons

must be reset first. When this has been

completed, Homelink is in learning mode

so that you can perform programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from

the HomeLink button you wish to pro-

gram while keeping the indicator light in

view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans-

mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica-

tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

1HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming Step 2 with procedures

noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian

Programming” section. If the HomeLink

indicator light does not change to a rapidly

blinking light after performing these steps,

contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com

or by phoning the hotline at

1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-

ton up to two separate times to activate

the door. If the door does not activate,

press and hold the just-trained HomeLink

button and observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a

constant light continue with “Pro-

gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the

programming of a rolling code equip-

ped device (most commonly a garage

door opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer.)

There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-

eral seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the “Program-

ming” procedures, replace “Programming

HomeLink” step 2 with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter until the HomeLink indi-

cator light changes from a slow to a rap-

idly blinking light. Now you may release

both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-

mitter buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-

plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLink button until the trained

device begins to operate (this may take sev-

eral seconds). Activation will now occur for

the trained device (i.e., garage door opener,

gate operator, security system, entry door

lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven-

ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time. In the event

that there are still programming difficulties or

questions, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com or by phoning the hotline

at 1–800–355–3515.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink

will function for 30 minutes after the driv-

er's door has been opened.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

Use the following procedure to reset (erase

programming) from the three HomeLink but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but

can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-

lowing section):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash.

2. Release both buttons.

> HomeLink is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time beginning with

“Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a

HomeLink button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-

Link button, proceed with “Programming”

- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact Home-

Link at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–

355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the

device.2

2The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Start

Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see

page 88 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

•Fasten the seat belt.

•Check that the seat, steering wheel

and mirrors are adjusted properly.

•Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat

if necessary.

WARNING

•Never use more than one floor mat at

a time on the driver's floor. An extra

mat on the driver's floor can cause the

accelerator and/or brake pedal to

catch. Check that the movement of

these pedals is not impeded.

•Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-

factured for your car. They must be

firmly secured in the clips on the floor

so that they cannot slide and become

trapped under the pedals on the driv-

er's side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot

as far as possible, with the metallic key

blade pointing outward (not inserted into

the slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOP

ENGINE button. The autostart function

will operate the starter motor until the

engine starts or until its overheating func-

tion stops it.

The starter motor operates for a maxi-

mum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not

started, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the third

try, wait for approximately 3 minutes

before trying to start it again to give the

battery time to recover its starting

capacity.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the key-

less drive feature, one of the remote keys

must be in the passenger compartment.

Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to

start the vehicle.

1On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.

2If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

124

WARNING

•Always remove the remote key from

the ignition slot when leaving the vehi-

cle and ensure that the ignition in

mode 0 (see page 89 for information

about the ignition modes), especially if

there are children in the vehicle.

•On vehicles with the optional keyless

drive, never remove the remote key

from the vehicle while it is being driven

or towed.

•Always place the gear selector in Park

and apply the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. Never leave the

vehicle unattended with the engine

running.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monox-

ide, which is invisible and odorless but

very poisonous.

NOTE

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a

short period. This is done to help bring

components in the emission control

system to their normal operating tem-

perature as quickly as possible, which

enables them to control emissions and

help reduce the vehicle's impact on

the environment3.

CAUTION

•When starting in cold weather, the

automatic transmission may shift up at

slightly higher engine speeds than nor-

mal until the automatic transmission

fluid reaches normal operating tem-

perature.

•Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. Oil flow may not reach

some lubrication points fast enough to

prevent engine damage.

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never acceler-

ate until after you feel the transmission

engage. Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh

engagement and premature transmis-

sion wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a

standstill for prolonged periods of time

will help prevent overheating of the

automatic transmission fluid.

3If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

Engine Remote Start (ERS)*

Introduction

ERS is a feature that makes it possible to

remotely start the engine to cool or heat the

passenger compartment before driving.

The climate control system will start using the

same settings as when the engine was

switched off.

When the engine is started using ERS, it will

run for a maximum of 15 minutes before

automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS

starts, the engine must be started in the nor-

mal way before ERS can be used again.

NOTE

•Always adhere to applicable State,

Province and/or Local laws regarding

engine idling when using ERS.

•The service life of the remote key's

battery is affected by ERS use. If this

feature is used frequently, the battery

should be replaced once a year, see

page 60).

WARNING

Keep the following in mind before using

ERS

•The vehicle should be in view.

•The vehicle should be unoccupied.

•The vehicle must not be parked

indoors or in an enclosed area.

Exhaust fumes are harmful to the

health.

Using ERS

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

Unlock

Information4.

Approach lighting

Starting the engine

The maximum range for ERS is approximately

100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is

unobstructed. The vehicle must also be

locked.

To start the engine:

1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly.

2. Immediately press the unlock button (2)

for approximately 2 seconds.

If the requirements for ERS have been met,

the following will occur:

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

2. The engine will start.

3. The turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds to indicate that the engine has

started.

After the engine has started, the vehicle

remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.

4PCC keys only, see page 62

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Models with a Personal Car

Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see

page 62)

The indicator light for approach

lighting will flash several times and

then glow continuously if all of the

requirements for ERS have been

met. However, this does not indicate that

ERS has started the engine.

To check if ERS has started the engine, press

the information button (3). If the engine has

started, the indicator light for buttons

(1) och (4) will illuminate.

Active functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are activated:

•The climate control system

•The infotainment system.

Deactivated functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are deactivated:

•Headlights

•Parking lights

•License plate lights

•Windshield wipers

Switching off an engine started with

ERS

Any of the following will switch off the engine

if it has been started with ERS:

•Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock

button (2) on the remote key

•Unlocking the vehicle

•Opening a door

•Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal

•Moving the gear selector from the P posi-

tion

•If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons

(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and

switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel

display

If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be

displayed in the instrument panel.

Switching off the engine

With the engine running, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or

if the vehicle is moving, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button twice or press and

hold it in until the engine switches off.

Jump starting

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

Follow these instructions to jump start your

vehicle's dead battery or to jump start

another vehicle's dead battery using your

vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be

used is in another vehicle, check that the

vehicles are not touching to prevent prema-

ture completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

127

jump starting instructions provided for the

other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to

mode 0, see page 88).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)

terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),

marked with a "+" sign, located under a

folding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3)

and to the ground point in your vehicle's

engine compartment (right engine mount

at the top, on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,

then start the engine in the vehicle with

dead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first remove

the negative (–) terminal jumper cable

(black). Then remove the positive (+) ter-

minal jumper cable (red).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully to

avoid short circuits with other components

in the engine compartment.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to

any part of the fuel system or to any

moving parts. Avoid touching hot

manifolds.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If

contact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medi-

cal help immediately if eyes are affec-

ted.

•Never expose the battery to open

flame or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Failure to follow the instructions for

jump starting can lead to injury.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

128

Automatic transmission

G021351

Shiftgate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move the gear selector

between the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely

between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and

Drive (D) positions while driving.

CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-

tored to help prevent damage to the trans-

mission or other drivetrain components. If

there is a risk of overheating, the warning

symbol on the instrument panel will illumi-

nate and a text message will be displayed.

Follow the instructions provided there.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a

hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal

for several seconds after the pedal has been

released in order to keep the vehicle at a

standstill.

The brakes will be released after several sec-

onds or when the driver presses the accelera-

tor pedal.

Park: position P

Select the P position when starting or park-

ing.

Shiftlock

When P has been selected, the transmission

is mechanically blocked in this position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the igni-

tion must be in at least mode II (see page 88)

before the gear lever can be moved from the

P position.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when the

vehicle is parked, particularly when park-

ing on a hill. The transmission's P mode

may not be able to keep the vehicle sta-

tionary if it is parked on an incline.

Press the control to apply the parking brake,

see page 137.

CAUTION

The vehicle must be stationary when posi-

tion P is selected.

Gear indicator

The gear currently being

used is displayed on the right

side of the instrument panel.

The "S" symbol turns orange

if Sport mode is being used.

Reverse: position R

The vehicle must be stationary when position

R is selected.

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Neutral: position N

No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started with the gear selector in this position.

Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-

tionary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive: position D

D is the normal driving position. The car auto-

matically shifts between the various forward

gears, based on the level of acceleration and

speed. The car must be at a standstill when

shifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–)

Geartronic allows you to manually shift

among your vehicle's forward gears. Gear-

tronic can be selected at any time.

To shift gears manually, move the

gear selector to the side from D

toward +S–. The +S– symbol in the

instrument panel will change from

white to orange and the number of the gear

currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis-

played (see the following illustration).

•To return to automatic shifting mode from

+S–, move the gear selector to the side

toward D.

Gear shift indicator*

Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*1

This option indicates when to shift up or

down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will

appear above or below the number of the

current gear to prompt the driver to shift up

or down.

While driving

•If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was being

used in the Drive position will also initially

be selected in the manual shifting posi-

tion.

•Move the gear selector forward (toward +)

to shift to a higher gear or rearward

(toward –) to shift to a lower gear.

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–",

the transmission will downshift one gear

at a time and will utilize the braking power

of the engine. If the current speed is too

high for using a lower gear, the downshift

will not occur until the speed has

decreased enough to allow the lower gear

to be used.

•If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-

mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock: Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and

the vehicle has been stationary for at least

3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine

is running) then the gear selector is locked.

In order to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must

be depressed and the ignition must be in at

least position II, see page 88.

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles*

In addition to the manual gearshift function

using the gear selector, this option makes it

possible to manually shift gears from the

steering wheel.

1Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

130

Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles

"–": Shift down to a lower gear.

"+": Shift up to a higher gear.

In order to shift gears with the paddles, they

have to first be activated. The gear selector

can remain in the D position.

To activate the paddles:

•Pull either paddle toward the steering

wheel and release it; the D in the instru-

ment panel will change to the number of

the gear currently being used.

To shift gears:

•Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel

and release it.

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)2

This transmission mode provides sportier

shifting characteristics and enables a more

active driving style by making it possible to

drive at higher rpm in each gear before shift-

ing up. The engine also responds faster when

the accelerator pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move

the gear selector to the left. The transmission

will not switch to manual shifting mode until

the gear selector is moved forward or rear-

ward toward + or –.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•On vehicles equipped with Sport

mode, the transmission symbol in the

main instrument panel will change

from D to S when the gear selector is

moved to the manual shifting mode. If

the gear selector is moved toward "+"

or "-", the number of the gear currently

being used will be displayed, see

page 79).

•Please be aware that using Sport

mode may result in a slight decrease in

fuel economy. Driving in D can help

improve fuel economy.

Geartronic: starting on slippery

surfaces

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual

shifting mode can help provide better traction

when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do

so:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the

gear selector to the side from D toward

+S–.

2. Press the gear selector forward and

release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press

the selector forward again and release it

to select 3rd gear. The optional steering

wheel paddles can also be used; see the

previous section "Geartronic: steering

wheel paddles."

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently

on the accelerator pedal.

2Certain models only

03 Your driving environment

Transmission

131

Shiftlock override

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example

because of a dead battery, the gear selector

must be moved from the P position before

the vehicle can be moved3.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of

the storage compartment behind the cen-

ter console to expose the small opening

for overriding the shiftlock system.

Insert the key blade into the opening.

Press the key blade down as far as possi-

ble and keep it held down.

Move the gear selector from the P posi-

tion. For information on the key blade,

see page 64.

All Wheel Drive: AWD4

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent

All Wheel Drive, which means that power is

distributed automatically between the front

and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi-

tions, most of the engine's power is directed

to the front wheels. However, if there is any

tendency for the front wheels to spin, an elec-

tronically controlled coupling distributes

power to the wheels that have the best trac-

tion.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Service

required will be appear in the information

display if an electrical fault should occur in

the AWD system. A warning light will also

illuminate in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, have the system checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

3If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 126.

4Standard on certain models.

03 Your driving environment

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

These gauges help improve driving economy.

To display or remove these functions from the

instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see

page 80).

Driving statistics are also stored and can be

displayed in the form of a bar chart (see

page 221).

Eco Guide

This gauge gives an indication of how eco-

nomically the vehicle is being driven.

Current (instantaneous) reading

Average

Current (instantaneous) reading

This is the current level of economical driving;

the higher the reading, the more economically

the vehicle is being driven.

This value is calculated based on the vehi-

cle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load

and brake use.

The optimal speed range is between approxi-

mately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at

as low rpm as possible. The markers fall

when the brake or accelerator pedal is

pressed.

If the current reading is very low, the red field

in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay,

indicating low driving economy.

Average

The average reading changes gradually

according to changes in the current reading

to indicate how economically the vehicle has

been driven recently. The higher the average

reading, the more economically the vehicle

has been driven.

Power Meter

This gauge indicates the engine power that

has been utilized and the amount of power

remaining.

Available power

Utilized power

Available power

The smaller, upper indicator shows the

engine's available power1. The higher the

reading on the scale, the greater the amount

of power remaining in the current gear.

Utilized power

The larger, lower indicator shows the amount

of engine power that has been utilized1. The

1Depending on rpm

03 Your driving environment

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

higher the reading on the scale, the greater

the amount of power that is being utilized.

The larger the gap between the two indica-

tors, the greater the amount of power remain-

ing.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Brake system

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-

sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a

problem should occur in one of these circuits,

it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the

other brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pres-

sure, the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will

light up to warn the driver that a fault has

occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid

level in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in

the reservoir or if a brake system message

is shown in the information display: DO

NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian and have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspection

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-

tion of the brake pads can be checked by

raising the vehicle (see page 318 for informa-

tion about using the jack and removing a

wheel) and performing a visual inspection of

the brake pads.

WARNING

•If the vehicle has been driven immedi-

ately prior to a brake pad inspection,

the wheel hub, brake components,

etc., will be very hot. Allow time for

these components to cool before car-

rying out the inspection.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

WARNING

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be dam-

aged.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,

non-slippery surface.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

•The jack must correctly engage the

jack attachment.

•Never allow any part of your body to

be extended under a vehicle suppor-

ted by a jack.

Brake lights

The brake lights come on automatically when

the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights

The adaptive brake lights activate in the event

of sudden braking or if the ABS system is

activated. This function causes an additional

taillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi-

nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

}}

135

The adaptive brake lights activate if:

•The ABS system activates for more than

approximately a half second

•In the event of sudden braking while the

vehicle is moving at speeds above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the

brake lights and additional taillights remain on

for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or

until braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure

which is only created when the engine is run-

ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with

the engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consid-

erably higher pressure will be required on the

brake pedal to compensate for the lack of

power assistance. This can happen for exam-

ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine

is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The

brake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through

an automatic car wash can cause water to

collect on the brake discs and pads. This will

cause a delay in braking effect when the

pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay

when the brakes are needed, depress the

pedal occasionally when driving through rain,

slush, etc. This will remove the water from the

brakes. Check that brake application feels

normal. This should also be done after wash-

ing or starting in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain

when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or

when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of the

brakes is less efficient than when driving on

level roads. To reduce the strain on the

brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the

engine help with the braking. Do not forget

that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will

be subjected to a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to

improve vehicle control (stopping and steer-

ing) during severe braking conditions by limit-

ing brake lockup. When the system "senses"

impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-

matically modulated in order to help prevent

lockup that could lead to a skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostic

test when the engine has been started and

driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-

matic test may be performed when the vehi-

cle first reaches a speed of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate

several times and a sound may be audible

from the ABS control module, which is nor-

mal.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This

delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin-

ings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet

weather, prior to long-term parking, and after

the vehicle has been washed. Do this by

braking gently for a short period while the

vehicle is moving.

Emergency Brake Assistance

EBA is designed to provide full brake effect

immediately in the event of sudden, hard

braking. The system is activated by the speed

with which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brake

pedal will go down and pressure in the brake

system immediately increases to the maxi-

mum level. Maintain full pressure on the

brake pedal in order to utilize the system

completely. EBA is automatically deactivated

when the brake pedal is released.

03 Your driving environment

Brakes

136

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure

in the brake system immediately

increases to the maximum level. You

must maintain full pressure on the

brake pedal in order to utilize the sys-

tem completely. There will be no brak-

ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA

is automatically deactivated when the

brake pedal is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal

will return to its usual position when it

is released.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brake

fluid level. If the level is low, fill

with brake fluid and check for

the cause of the brake fluid

loss.

Steady glow for two seconds

when the engine is started –

There was a fault in the brake

system's ABS function when

the engine was last running.

WARNING

If and come on at the

same time and the brake level is below the

MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys-

tem-related message is shown in the infor-

mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the

vehicle towed to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician and have the

brake system inspected.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

137

Electric parking brake

An electric parking brake has the same func-

tion as a manual parking brake.

NOTE

•A faint sound from the parking brake's

electric motor can be heard when the

parking brake is being applied. This

sound can also be heard during the

automatic function check of the park-

ing brake.

•The brake pedal will move slightly

when the electric parking brake is

applied or released.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the park-

ing brake cannot be applied or released.

Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery

voltage is too low, see page 126.

Applying the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Push the control.

>The symbol in the instrument

panel flashes while the parking brake is

being applied and glows steadily when

the parking brake has been fully

applied.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that

the vehicle is at a standstill.

4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear

selector must be in position P.

NOTE

•In an emergency the parking brake can

be applied when the vehicle is moving

by holding in the control. Braking will

be interrupted when the accelerator

pedal is depressed or the control is

released.

•An audible signal will sound during this

procedure if the vehicle is moving at

speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Parking on a hill

•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the

front wheels so that they point away from

the curb.

•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the

front wheels so that they point toward the

curb.

The parking brake should also be applied.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

138

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot

and press the START/STOP ENGINE

button (or press the START/STOP

ENGINE button with a valid remote key in

the passenger compartment on vehicles

with the optional keyless drive).

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine

is running and the driver is wearing a

seat belt.

•The electric parking brake will be

released immediately when the acceler-

ator pedal is pressed and the gear

selector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and press the accelerator pedal. The

parking brake will release when the vehi฀

cle begins to move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking

brake is released automatically on a steep

incline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever

pushed in with the left hand while shifting

into Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to

pull away, release the parking brake lever

only after the vehicle begins to move.

Symbol and messages in the

instrument panel

See page 199 for information about display-

ing or erasing messages.

Symbol Message Description/action

"Message"Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation

then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

139

Symbol Message Description/action

-Park brake not

fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev-

eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error mes-

sage showing, a warning signal sounds.

-Parking brake not

applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several

times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message

showing, a warning signal sounds.

-Parking brake

Service required

A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the

fault has been corrected, always put the

gear selector in P and turn the wheels so

that they point away from the curb if the

vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb

if it is pointing downhill.

G000000

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Stability system..................................................................................... 142

Road sign information (RSI)* ................................................................ 145

Cruise control........................................................................................ 147

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 149

Distance Alert* ..................................................................................... 160

City Safety™ ........................................................................................ 163

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... 169

Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 177

Park assist*........................................................................................... 183

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .......................................................... 187

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* ................................................ 191

DRIVER SUPPORT

04 Driver support

Stability system

142

Introduction

The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

system (DSTC) consists of a number of func-

tions designed to help reduce wheel spin,

counteract skidding, and to generally help

improve directional stability.

CAUTION

A pulsating sound will be audible when the

system is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce

wheel spin by transferring power from a drive

wheel that begins to lose traction to the

wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on

the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions

and cannot be switched off.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-

ity, for example when cornering, by braking

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle

shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions

and cannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to help

prevent the drive wheels from spinning while

the vehicle is accelerating.

Corner Traction Control – CTC

CTC compensates for understeering and

helps provide additional stability when accel-

erating through a curve by preventing the

inside wheel from spinning. This is particularly

useful when accelerating on a curving high-

way on-ramp.

CTC is most effective if the stability system's

Sport mode is selected. See the section

about Sport mode.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC helps keep the engine running if the

wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when

shifting down in the Geartronic manual shift-

ing mode or while using the engine's braking

function on a slippery surface. If the engine

were to stop, power steering would not func-

tion, making the vehicle more difficult to

steer.

Trailer Stability Assist – TSA1

Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle

that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and

trailer have begun to sway. See page 292 for

more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if the

driver selects Sport mode.

Operation

Sport mode

The stability system is always activated and

cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can select Sport mode,

which offers more active driving characteris-

tics. In this mode, the engine management

system monitors movement of the accelerator

pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving

by allowing more lateral movement of the rear

wheels before DSTC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as when

driving with snow chains, or driving in deep

snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to

temporarily use Sport mode for maximum

tractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-

ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help

stabilize the vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

1Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed

04 Driver support

Stability system

}}

143

1. Press the My Car button in the center

console control panel and select My

XC60 DSTC in the menu.

2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu

by pressing EXIT.

> This puts DSTC in Sport mode.

Sport mode remains active until the driver

switches it off in the menu or until the engine

is switched off. DSTC will return to normal

mode when the engine is restarted.

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel

Symbol Message Description

DSTC Temporarily

OFF

The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC

reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

•Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.

•If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-

shop to have the system inspected.

and

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

-Sport mode has been activated.

04 Driver support

Stability system

144

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but

can never replace, the driver's judgment

and responsibility when operating the vehi-

cle. Speed and driving style should always

be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

Introduction

Examples of readable road signs

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that

helps the driver see road signs with the pos-

ted speed limit.

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the

speed limit, this will be displayed in the center

console.

WARNING

RSI does not function in all situations and

is only intended to provide supplementary

information.

The driver is always responsible for oper-

ating the vehicle safely.

Operation

Speed limit information

When RSI registers a road sign showing the

speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol

on the instrument panel.

Settings in MY CAR

Possible settings in MY CAR

Displaying the speed limit indication can be

deactivated. To do so:

•Deselect the alternative in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Road Sign

Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Speed alert

The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle

exceeds the posted speed limit by more than

3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the

symbol with the posted speed limit in the

instrument panel begins to flash.

To activate speed alert:

•Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR

Settings Car settings Speed alert

or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Limitations

RSI's camera has the same limitations as the

human eye. See page 173 for more informa-

tion about the camera's limitations.

Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit

(such as a sign with a town's name and the

permitted speed limit) will not be registered

by RSI.

Other factors that may interfere with RSI

include:

•Faded signs

•Signs located in a curve

04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)*

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•Twisted or damaged signs

•Obstructed signs

•Signs that are partially covered by snow,

ice, etc.

04 Driver support

Cruise control

147

Operation

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicates

standby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (gray

symbol indicates standby mode)

Engaging the cruise control function

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control

system must be engaged (put in standby

mode).

–Press the CRUISE button (1).

>The symbol illuminates and the text

(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-

trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

•Putting cruise control in standby mode

does not set a cruising speed.

•When cruise control is in standby

mode, the driver's seat belt must be

fastened before a cruising speed can

be set.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons set the vehicle's

current speed. The set speed is shown in the

display.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at

speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by using the or

buttons.

1. Press and hold down or until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

> This will become the set speed when

the button is released.

2. Press or for approximately a half

second and release the button to

increase or decrease vehicle speed by

approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

•A temporary increase in speed by

pressing the accelerator pedal, for less

than 1 minute (e.g. when passing

another car), does not affect the cur-

rent cruise control setting. The vehicle

will automatically return to the previ-

ously set speed when the accelerator

pedal is released.

•If one of the cruise control buttons is

kept depressed for more than approx.

1 minute cruise control is disengaged.

The engine must then be switched off

in order to reset cruise control.

04 Driver support

Cruise control

148

Automatic deactivation

Cruise control is automatically deactivated

temporarily if one of the following occurs:

•If the speed drops below approximately

20 mph (30 km/h).

•When the brake pedal is depressed.

•If the gear selector is moved to position

•During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

•If the vehicle's speed is increased by

using the accelerator pedal for more than

1 minute.

The currently set speed will be saved in the

system's memory.

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise

control by pressing 0. The saved speed is

shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed

If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing .

The vehicle's speed returns to the most

recently set speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in

speed after the button has been

pressed.

Deactivation

Cruise control is disengaged by pressing

or by switching off the engine. The set speed

is cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads. Cruise control may not maintain set

speed on steep downgrades.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional

system designed to assist the driver by main-

taining a set speed or a set time interval to

the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for

use on long straight roads in steady traffic,

such as on highways and other main roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed

and the time interval to the vehicle ahead,

ACC functions as follows:

•If there are no other vehicles in the lane

ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at

the set speed.

•If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower

moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-

tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead. When there are no longer

slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi-

cle will accelerate to resume the set

speed.

If ACC is switched off completely or in

standby mode and your vehicle comes too

close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will

be warned by the Distance Alert system (see

page 160).

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic,

weather and road conditions. The

"Function" section provides informa-

tion about limitations that the driver

must be aware of before using this

feature.

•This system is designed to be a sup-

plementary driving aid. It is not, how-

ever, intended to replace the driver's

attention and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not

maintain a suitable speed or suitable

distance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview1

Warning light, braking by driver required

Controls in steering wheel

Radar sensor in front grille

Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

•A cruise control system to maintain a set

speed

•A system to maintain a set distance to the

vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a

time interval. For example, you can

choose to remain approximately 2 sec-

onds behind the vehicle ahead. The

actual distance required to maintain a

1The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2-second interval will vary according the

speed of the vehicles.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or

stationary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when

there is a great deal of water or slush

on the road, during heavy rain or

snow, in poor visibility, on winding

roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the

same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor.

Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler-

ating and braking. The brakes may emit a

sound when they are being modulated by the

adaptive cruise control system. This is nor-

mal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive

cruise control system modulates the

brakes. Do not rest your foot under the

brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly

regulate speed. However, the driver must

apply the brakes in situations that require

immediate braking. This applies when there

are great differences in speed between vehi-

cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor,

braking may occur unexpectedly or not at

all, see page 156.

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active

mode at any permitted speed. However, if the

vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low,

ACC disengages (goes into standby mode)

and will no longer modulate the brakes2. The

driver will then have to maintain a safe dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in

standby mode or is switched off com-

pletely, the brakes will not be modulated

automatically. The driver must assume full

control over the vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force

that is equivalent to approximately 40% of

the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa-

tions requiring more brake force than ACC

can provide and if the driver does not apply

the brakes, an audible signal from the Colli-

sion Warning system will sound and warning

light will illuminate (see page 170) in the

windshield to alert the driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

2Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of

vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see

page 156. In some cases there may be no

warning or the warning may be delayed.

The driver should always apply the brakes

when necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly

level roads. The system may have difficulty

maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle

ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is car-

rying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In

these situations, the driver should always be

prepared to apply the brakes if necessary.

Operation

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

Decrease/increase time interval

Put in active mode and set a speed (each

additional press increases/decreases

speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

Set speed (shown in green when active,

shown in white when in standby mode)

Time interval

ACC active (green symbol) or in standby

mode (white symbol)

Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed

and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it

must first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

•Press (2).

> The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in

the instrument panel to indicate that ACC

is in standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Setting a speed

Once ACC has been put in standby mode:

•Press or (4).

> The set speed, for example 60 mph (5),

will be magnified for several seconds and

the frame around the speed will change

colors from white to green to indicate

that this speed has been stored (set).

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

When this symbol has changed col-

ors from white to green, ACC is in

active mode and the vehicle will

maintain the set speed.

This symbol indicates that

you are approaching a vehi-

cle ahead.

ACC will switch from main-

taining a set speed to main-

taining a set distance from

that vehicle.

When this happens, a speed

range will be indicated on

the speedometer:

The higher speed (the cur-

rently set speed (5)) will be

marked in green.

The lower speed in the range is the speed of

the vehicle ahead.

Changing the set speed

•After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by briefly press-

ing the or buttons. Each time one

of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's

speed changes by 3 mph

(approximately 5 km/h). If the speed is

increased by pressing the accelerator

pedal, the vehicle's speed when the but-

ton is pressed will be set.

•Press and hold one of the buttons to

increase/decrease the speed by 1 mph

(approximately 1 km/h) at a time. Release

the button when you have reached the

desired speed.

NOTE

•If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control

buttons is pressed for more than

approximately one minute, ACC will be

deactivated. The engine must then be

switched off and restarted to reset

ACC.

•In some situations Adaptive Cruise

Control cannot be put in active mode.

Cruise control Unavailable is shown

in the display, see page 158.

Setting a time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be

increased by pressing and decreased by

pressing . The current time interval is

shown briefly in the display following adjust-

ment.

Different time intervals can

be selected and are shown in

the instrument panel3 as 1–5

horizontal bars. The greater

the number of bars, the

longer the time interval. One

bar represents a time interval

of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

To set/change a time interval:

•Press the / buttons (3).

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi-

cle ahead is short, ACC increases the time

interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle

ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows

the time interval to vary considerably in cer-

tain situations.

WARNING

•Only use a time interval that is suitable

in current traffic conditions.

•A short time interval gives the driver

limited reaction time if an unexpected

situation occurs in traffic.

3The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see page 160) is activated

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in

standby mode):

•Press .

This symbol and the marking for the set

speed with change colors from green to

white.

The previously set speed and time interval are

resumed by pressing .

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Standby mode due to action by the

driver

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in

standby mode:

•if the brakes are applied

•if the gear selector is moved to N

•if the driver drives faster than the set

speed for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regu-

late the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed

for a short time, such as when passing

another vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem-

porarily and is reactivated when the pedal

is released.

Automatic standby mode

ACC is linked to other systems such as the

stability and traction control system (DSTC). If

this system is not functioning properly, ACC

will switch off automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation, an

audible signal will sound and the message

Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the

instrument panel. The driver must then inter-

vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the

surrounding traffic and regulate the distance

to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be

caused if:

•engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

•The driver's door is opened

•The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt

•the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph

(30 km/h)4

•the wheels lose traction

•brake temperature is high

•the radar sensor is obstructed by, for

example, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed

If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva-

ted by pressing the button on the steering

wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the

most recently set speed.

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Passing another vehicle

If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by

ACC and the driver indicates that he/she

would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using

the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel-

erating briefly.

This function is active at speeds above

approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

4Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will also

cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in

certain situations other than passing

another vehicle, for example using the left

turn signal to indicate a lane change or a

turn toward a highway exit at speeds

above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

Turning ACC off completely

•From standby mode, press once.

•From active mode, press twice.

The set speed and time interval are then

cleared from the system's memory and can-

not be resumed by pressing .

Toggling between ACC and CC

(standard Cruise Control)

Switching from ACC to CC

This may be useful if, for example, the radar

sensor is obstructed in some way. See the

section "The radar sensor and its limitations"

on page 156 for additional information.

•Press and hold the button; the symbol

in the instrument panel will switch from

to .

> This activates the standard cruise control

function (see page 147).

WARNING

Switching from ACC to CC means that:

•Your vehicle will no longer automati-

cally maintain a set distance to a vehi-

cle ahead.

•Only the set speed will be maintained

and the driver will have to apply the

brakes when needed.

Switching from CC to ACC

Switch off cruise control by pressing once

or twice as needed according to the instruc-

tions in the previous section "Turning ACC off

completely." The next time the system is

switched on, ACC will be reactivated.

Queue Assist

Introduction

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-

sion.

Queue Assist consists of the following func-

tions:

•Enhanced speed interval (including when

the vehicle is at a complete stop or is

moving at speed below 18 mph

(30 km/h))

•Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

•No automatic braking when at a standstill

•The parking brake is applied automati-

cally

Please note that the lowest speed that can be

set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can

maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle

ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist

consists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval

to the vehicle ahead at any permissible

speed, including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below

18 mph (30 km/h):

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

•The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-

sonable distance (not farther away than

approx. 100 ft/30 meters)

•The lowest speed that can be selected is

18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including

a complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately

3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi-

cle will begin moving again automatically as

soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle

ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automat-

ically go into standby mode.

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in

one of the following ways:

•By pressing

•By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following

the vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following the

vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep your

vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes.

After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking

brake will be engaged and ACC will go into

standby mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must release

the parking brake (see page 138).

Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be

a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle

that the radar sensor has detected) from a

moving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys-

tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC

will not react to a stationary vehicle and

apply the brakes but will instead acceler-

ate to the previously set speed. The driver

must actively apply the brakes to stop the

vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby

mode if:

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if

the target object is a stationary vehicle or

some other type of object such as e.g., a

speed bump.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to

follow.

No automatic braking when at a

standstill

In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply

the brakes and go into standby mode while

the vehicle is not moving. This means that the

driver will have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

•The driver presses the brake pedal

•The parking brake is activated

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•The gear selected is moved to P,N or R

•The driver presses the button to put

ACC in standby mode

The parking brake is applied

automatically

In certain situations, ACC will apply the park-

ing brake in order to continue keeping the

vehicle at a standstill.

This happens if:

•The driver opens the door or takes off

his/her seat belt

•DSTC is put in Sport mode (see

page 142)

•ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill

for more than 2 minutes

•The engine has been switched off

•The brakes have overheated

The radar sensor and its limitations

In addition to being used by ACC, the radar

sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see

page 160) and Collision Warning with Full

Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see

page 169). This sensor is designed to detect

cars or larger vehicles driving in the same

direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.

WARNING

•If there is visible damage to the front

grille or you suspect that the radar

sensor may be damaged in any way,

contact a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician as soon as possible.

The radar sensor may only function

partially (or not at all) if it is damaged

or is not securely fastened in place.

•Accessories or other objects, such as

extra headlights, must not be installed

in front of the grille.

•Modification of the radar sensor could

make its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-

cles ahead is impeded:

•if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-

not detect other vehicles, for example in

heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are

obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensor

clean.

•if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-

cantly different from your own speed.

Situations where ACC may not function

optimally

WARNING

•The radar sensor has a limited field of

vision. In some situations it may detect

a vehicle later than expected or not

detect other vehicles at all.

•If ACC is not functioning properly,

cruise control will also be disabled.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor

cannot detect vehicles at close quarters,

for example a vehicle that suddenly

enters the lane between your vehicle and

the target vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the center of the

lane may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect

the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the tar-

get vehicle.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic,

weather and road conditions. The

"Function" section provides informa-

tion about limitations that the driver

must be aware of before using this

feature.

•This system is designed to be a sup-

plementary driving aid. It is not, how-

ever, intended to replace the driver's

attention and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not

maintain a suitable speed or suitable

distance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or

stationary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when

there is a great deal of water or slush

on the road, during heavy rain or

snow, in poor visibility, on winding

roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Radar blocked See manual

is displayed, this means that the radar signals

from the sensor have been obstructed and

that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of the

ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian

Detection will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some

way.

Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere

with the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect

the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that

it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

-DSTC Normal to enable

Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system DSTC is switched normal operating mode,

see page 142 for more information.

04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

Symbol Message Description

-Cruise control Cancel-

led

ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the

vehicle ahead.

-Cruise control Unavail-

able

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

•high brake temperature

•the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked See

manual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot

detect other vehicles.

In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see page 154

See page 156 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

-Cruise control Service

required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

-Press Brake To hold +

an audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep

the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal

will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

-Below 30 km/h Only

following

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle

ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides informa-

tion about the time interval to the vehicle

ahead.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter-

val information is only given for a vehicle that

is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same

direction. No information is provided for vehi-

cles driving toward you, moving very slowly,

or at a standstill.

Amber warning light1.

An amber warning light in the windshield

glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the

one ahead than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance to

the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise

Control is in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance

to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the

speed of your vehicle.

Operation

Press the button in the center instrument

panel to switch this function on or off. The

indicator light in the button illuminates when

the function is on.

Depending on the optional equipment

selected, there may not be room for a Dis-

tance Alert button in the center console. In

this case, the function is controlled through

the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to

Settings Car settings Distance alert

On/Off.

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease

Time interval On

Press to increase the interval or to

decrease it.

1The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Five different time intervals

can be selected and are

shown in the display as 1–5

horizontal bars. The greater

the number of bars, the

longer the time interval. One

bar represents approximately

1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is

approximately 3 seconds.

NOTE

•The higher your vehicle’s speed, the

greater the distance to the vehicle

ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a

given time interval.

•The set time interval is also used by

Adaptive Cruise Control, see

page 151.

WARNING

Only use a time interval that is suitable in

current traffic conditions.

Limitations

Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor

used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col-

lision Warning system. See page 156 for

more information on the radar sensor’s limita-

tions.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

WARNING

•Bad weather or winding roads may

affect the radar sensor’s capacity to

detect vehicles ahead.

•The size of the vehicle ahead, such as

a motorcycle, may also make it difficult

to detect. This may result in the warn-

ing light illuminating at a shorter dis-

tance than the one that has been set,

or that the light will not come on at all.

04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbols and text messages

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See

manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can-

not detect other vehicles. See page 156 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv-

ice required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop-

erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

163

Introduction

City Safety™1 is a support system designed

to help the driver avoid low speed collisions

when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go

traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 2 mph

(4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will

not react if your vehicle approaches another

vehicle at very low speed, for example, when

parking.

The function is active at speeds up to

approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists

the driver by applying the brakes automati-

cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce

the effects of a collision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late

as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa-

tion.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if

a low-speed collision is imminent. However,

the system will not intervene in situations

where the driver actively steers the vehicle or

applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot

be avoided. This is done in order to always

give the driver’s actions highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the

driver has not applied the brakes in time,

which means that the system cannot help the

driver in all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter the

way in which the driver operates the vehicle.

The driver should never rely solely on this

system to safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will

not be aware of City Safety™ except when

the system intervenes when a low-speed col-

lision is imminent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the

optional Collision Warning with Full Auto-

brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the

two systems interact. For more information

about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake

system, see page 169.

WARNING

•City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to

the driver. It can never replace the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions

or his/her responsibility for operating

the vehicle in a safe manner.

•City Safety™ does not function in all

driving situations or in all traffic,

weather or road conditions.

1City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

04 Driver support

City Safety™

164

WARNING

•City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle and does not react to small

vehicles or motorcycles or to people or

animals.

•City Safety™ is not activated when

your vehicle is backing up.

•City Safety™ functions at speeds up

to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can

help prevent a collision if the differ-

ence in speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead is less than

9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in

speed is greater, a collision cannot be

avoided but the speed at which the

collision occurs can be reduced. The

driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes

for full braking effect.

•City Safety™ will not intervene in a

potential collision situation if the vehi-

cle is being driven actively. The driver

is always responsible for maintaining a

safe distance to a vehicle or object

ahead.

Function

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you

using a laser sensor mounted in the upper

section of the windshield. If a collision is

imminent, City Safety™ will automatically

apply the brakes, which may feel like hard

braking.

If the difference in speed between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle ahead is more than

approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™

alone cannot prevent a collision from taking

place. The driver must apply the brakes to

help avoid a collision or reduce its effect.

When the function activates and applies the

brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/has

been active.

NOTE

•When City Safety™ applies the

brakes, the brake lights will illuminate.

•In cases where City Safety™ has stop-

ped the vehicle, the system will then

release the brakes. The driver must

apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at

a standstill.

Using City Safety™

NOTE

The City Safety™ function is activated

automatically each time the engine has

been switched off and restarted.

On and Off

In certain situations, it may be desirable to

switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving

in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.

may obscure the hood and windshield.

When the engine is running, City Safety™ can

be switched off as follows:

2The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

04 Driver support

City Safety™

165

Press My Car in the center console control

panel and go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems City Safety.

Select Off.

If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will

reactivate when the engine is restarted.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

•Follow the same procedure as for switch-

ing City Safety™ off but select On.

Limitations

The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed

to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles

ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and

darkness.

WARNING

The laser sensor has certain limitations

and its function may be reduced (or it may

not function at all) in conditions such as

heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or

thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa-

tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield

may also interfere with the sensor’s func-

tion.

Objects such as warning flags hanging from

long objects on the roof or accessories such

as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the

front of the vehicle that are higher than the

hood may also impede the sensor’s function.

Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-

ses on slippery road surfaces, which may

reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli-

sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system

(see page 142) will help provide the best pos-

sible braking capacity and stability.

City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas-

ures the way in which the light is reflected.

Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec-

tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally,

the license plate and taillight reflectors give

the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient

reflective surfaces to be detected.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the

laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

See page 164.

•Snow or ice on the hood deeper than

2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-

sor. Keep the hood free of ice and

snow.

•Do not mount or in any way attach

anything on the windshield that could

obstruct the laser sensor.

Troubleshooting

If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in

the information display, this indicates that the

City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in

some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead

of you, which means that the system is not

functioning.

However, this message will not be displayed

in all situations in which the sensor is

obstructed. For this reason, the driver must

ensure that the area of the windshield in front

of the sensor is always kept clean.

The following table shows some of the situa-

tions that can cause the message to be dis-

played and suggested actions.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

166

Cause Action

The area of the wind-

shield in front of the sen-

sor is dirty or covered by

ice or snow.

Clean the

windshield or

remove the ice/

snow.

The laser sensor's field

of view is obstructed.

Remove the

obstruction.

CAUTION

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should

occur in the section of the windshield in

front the laser sensor, contact a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician to

repair or replace the windshield (see the

illustration showing the location of the sen-

sor on page 164). Failing to do so may

result in reduced City Safety™ functional-

ity.

To help prevent limited or reduced func-

tionality, please also observe the following:

•Volvo recommends that cracks,

scratches or stone chips on the wind-

shield in front of the laser sensor

should not be repaired; in such cases,

the entire windshield should be

replaced.

•Before the windshield is replaced,

contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that

the correct windshield is ordered and

installed. If the wrong type of wind-

shield is used, this may cause City

Safety™ to function improperly or not

at all. Volvo recommends the use of

only Genuine Volvo Replacement

Windshields.

•When replacing windshield wipers, use

the same type or ones approved by

Volvo.

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam's

classification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly

with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class

1M laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's

physical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with

FDA performance standards for laser prod-

ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser

Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in the

following table:

04 Driver support

City Safety™

167

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × verti-

cal)

28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectors

may be affected by City Safety's laser sen-

sor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the following

points are not followed:

•It is essential that all pertinent instruc-

tions be followed when handling laser

instruments. Testing, repairing, remov-

ing, adjusting and/or replacing any

components in the laser sensor may

only be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Do not remove the laser sensor

(including removal of the lenses). A

laser sensor that has been removed

belongs to laser class 3B according to

standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser

class 3B present a risk of injury to the

eyes.

•The laser sensor’s connector must be

disconnected before the sensor is

removed from the windshield.

•The laser sensor must be mounted in

place on the windshield before con-

necting the sensor’s connector.

•Do not view the laser sensor (which

emits spreading, invisible laser beams)

with optical instruments from a dis-

tance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the

brakes, one or more of the symbols in the

main instrument panel may illuminate and its

associated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

04 Driver support

City Safety™

168

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City

Safety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 165.

City Safety Service

required

City Safety™ is not functioning.

•If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Introduction

Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and

Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the

driver if there is a risk of a collision with a

pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand-

still or one that is moving in the same direc-

tion as your vehicle.

Collision Warning consists of the following

three functions:

•Collision Warning warns the driver of a

potential collision situation.

•Brake Support helps the driver brake

efficiently in a critical situation.

•Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-

cally if a collision with a pedestrian or

another vehicle cannot be avoided and

the driver does not apply the brakes in

time or steer around the person/vehicle.

Auto-brake can help prevent a collision or

reduce the speed at which a collision

occurs.

Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is activated in cir-

cumstances where the driver should have

begun braking much sooner, the system will

not be able to assist the driver in all situa-

tions.

This system is designed to activate as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary interven-

tion.

The system should not be used in such a way

that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on

the system, the chances of an accident even-

tually occurring increase considerably.

The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys-

tems supplement each other. See page 163

for detailed information about City Safety™.

WARNING

No automatic system can be guaranteed

to function 100% correctly in all situations.

For that reason, never test the Auto-brake

system by driving toward a person or

object. This could result in serious injury or

death.

WARNING

•Collision Warning does not work in all

driving, traffic, weather and road con-

ditions. It does not react to vehicles

not traveling in the same direction as

your vehicle.

•Collision Warning does not react to

animals.

•Warnings are only provided when the

risk of collision is high. The "Function"

section provides information about

limitations that the driver must be

aware of before using Collision Warn-

ing.

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for

pedestrians at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h).

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•Collision Warning will not provide a

warning or brake the vehicle for

pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels,

even if there is street lighting in the

area.

•The auto-brake function can help pre-

vent a collision or reduce the speed at

impact but the driver should always

apply the brakes for the best possible

braking effect, even if auto-brake is

actively applying the brakes.

•Never wait for a collision warning. This

system is designed to be a supple-

mentary driving aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver's atten-

tion and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed, even when the colli-

sion warning system is in use.

•Maintenance of the Collision Warning

system's components must only be

performed by a trained and qualified

Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk

Radar sensor

Camera

Collision Warning

The radar sensor and the camera work

together to detect a pedestrian, stationary

vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the

same direction as your vehicle. If there is a

risk of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian,

the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning

light and an audible warning signal. Collision

warning is active at speeds above 3 mph

(4 km/h).

Brake Support

If the risk of collision continues to increase

after the collision warning has been given,

Brake Support is activated. Brake Support

prepares the brake system to react quickly,

and the brakes are applied slightly. This may

be experienced as a light tug.

If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking

effect will be provided. Brake Support also

increases brake force if the system deter-

mines that the driver has not applied ade-

quate pressure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brake

If a collision is imminent and the driver has

not applied the brakes or begun to steer

around the vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-

brake function is activated without the driver

pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is

applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed

when the collision occurs or limited brake

force is applied if this is sufficient to avoid the

collision.

NOTE

The auto-brake and brake support func-

tions are always on and cannot be turned

off.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Operation

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on

the center console control panel and using

the menus displayed.

Activating/deactivating both warning

signals

To switch Collision Warning's audible and

visual signals on or off at the same time,

press MY CAR on the center console control

panel and go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Collision

Warning. If Collision Warning is on, the sys-

tem will perform a self-test each time the

engine is started by briefly illuminating the

warning light. See page 201 for a description

of the menu system.

When the engine is switched on, the Collision

Warning setting that was being used when it

was switched off will be the default setting.

NOTE

The auto-brake and pedestrian detection

features are always on, even if the audible

and visual warning signals have been

deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the audible

warning signal only

The audible warning signal can be activated/

deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-

ter console control panel and going to

Settings Car settings Driver support

systems Warning sound if risk of

collision.

Setting a warning distance

This setting determines the distance at which

the visual and audible warnings are triggered.

Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing

MY CAR on the center console control panel

and going to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Collision

Warning Warning distance.

The warning distance determines the level of

sensitivity used by the system. The warning

distance Long provides an earlier warning.

Begin by using Long and if the system gives

too many warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

•The setting Short should only be used

in situations where traffic is light and

moving at low speeds.

•Collision Warning alerts the driver to

the risk of a collision but this function

cannot reduce the driver’s reaction

time.

•For Collision Warning to be as effec-

tive as possible, it is recommended

that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see

page 160.

NOTE

•When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,

the warning light and signal will be

used by that function, even if the

warnings provided by Collision Warn-

ing have been deactivated by the

driver.

•In situations where traffic is moving at

considerably different speeds, or if the

vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-

ings may be considered to be late,

even if the setting Long has been

selected.

Checking settings

The current Collision Warning settings can be

checked by pressing MY CAR on the center

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

console control panel and going to Settings

Car settings Driver support systems

Collision Warning.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor1.

In order to function properly, the camera and

laser sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice,

snow, etc., will reduce the function of these

components.

Remove ice and snow when necessary and

wash these areas regularly with a suitable car

washing liquid.

Limitations

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may make

the visual warning signal in the windshield dif-

ficult to see. For this reason, always activate

the audible warning signal.

Slippery driving conditions increase braking

distance, which can reduce the system's

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-

tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide

the best possible braking effect while helping

to maintain stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal may be tempo-

rarily disengaged in the event of high pas-

senger compartment temperature due to

strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the

audible warning signal will be used, even if

it has been deactivated in the menu sys-

tem.

WARNING

•In certain situations, the system can-

not provide warnings or warnings may

be delayed if traffic conditions or other

external factors make it impossible for

the radar sensor or camera to detect a

pedestrian or a vehicle ahead.

•Warnings may not be provided if the

distance to the vehicle ahead is short,

or if movements of the steering wheel/

brake pedal are great, such as during

active driving.

•The sensor system has a limited range

for pedestrians and provides warnings

and braking effect most effectively at

speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For

stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the

system functions best if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 45 mph

(70 km/h).

•Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-

ing vehicles may not be provided in

dark conditions or in poor visibility.

The Collision Warning system uses the same

radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For

more information on the radar sensor and its

limitations, see page 156.

1The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

NOTE

If warnings are given too frequently, the

warning distance can be reduced (see

page 171). This causes the system to pro-

vide later warnings, which decreases the

total number of warnings provided.

WARNING

•The system is not activated at speeds

under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-

fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you

approach a vehicle ahead at very low

speed, such as when parking.

•The driver's actions always have high-

est priority and override the Collision

Warning system. This means that the

system will not intervene in situations

where the driver is actively steering,

braking or pressing the accelerator

pedal, even if a collision is imminent.

•When Auto-brake has prevented a col-

lision with a stationary object, your

vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle

has been braked for a moving vehicle

ahead, your vehicle's speed will be

reduced to the same speed as that

vehicle's.

The camera’s limitations

The camera is used by Collision Warning with

Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see

page 177), and Lane Departure Warning (see

page 180).

NOTE

•To help protect the camera in very hot

conditions, it may be temporarily

switched off for approximately 15

minutes after the engine has been

started.

•Keep the section of the windshield in

front of the camera clean and free of

ice, snow, or condensation.

WARNING

•The camera has the same limitations

as the human eye. In other words, its

“vision is impaired” by adverse

weather conditions such as heavy

snowfall, dense fog, etc. These condi-

tions may reduce the function of sys-

tems that depend on the camera or

cause these systems to temporarily

stop functioning.

•Never place any objects, decals, etc.,

on the windshield in front of the cam-

era. This could reduce or block the

camera’s function, and could cause

one or more of the systems that utilize

the camera to stop functioning.

•Strong sunlight, reflections from the

road surface, ice or snow covering the

road, a dirty road surface, or unclear

lane marker lines may drastically

reduce the camera’s capacity to

detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian

or another vehicle.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pedestrians

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Collision Warning system can only iden-

tify and detect a pedestrian who is standing

upright. This person can be standing still,

walking or running.

This means that the system has to be able to

identify a person's head, arms, shoulders,

legs, the upper and lower parts of the body

and a person's pattern of movement when

walking or running.

If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-

era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.

The following conditions apply:

•In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys-

tem must have a full view of the person's

entire body and the person must be at

least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.

•The system cannot detect a pedestrian

carrying a large object.

•The camera's capacity to see a pedes-

trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as

it is for the human eye.

•The camera's function is deactivated and

will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or

in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in

the area.

WARNING

•Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake

and Pedestrian Detection is designed

to be a supplementary driving aid. It is

not, however, intended to replace the

driver's attention and judgement. The

driver is always responsible for operat-

ing the vehicle in a safe manner.

•The system cannot detect all pedes-

trians in all situations, such as in dark-

ness/at night and cannot detect parti-

ally hidden pedestrians, people who

are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm)

tall, or people wearing clothing that

obscures the contours of their bodies.

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is displayed, this means that the

camera is obscured and cannot detect

pedestrians, vehicles or road marker lines in

front of the vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Collision Warning

with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec-

tion, Lane Departure Warning, and Driver

Alert Control will not have full functionality.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered

with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis-

ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is

dirty.

Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this

surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Description

Collision Warning

Off

Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear

after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning

Unavailable

Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate the

function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was

activated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sen-

sors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow,

ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 173 for

more information on the camera’s limitations.

04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See

manual

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for example

by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see

page 156 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn.

Service required

Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Introduction

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a

driver who may be becoming fatigued or who

is inadvertently leaving the lane.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions that can be switched on

together or separately.

•Driver Alert Control (DAC)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see

page 180

When one or both of the functions has been

switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-

vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of

40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle's

speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is depend-

ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by

painted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not function

in all situations and is designed to be a

supplementary aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver’s attention

and judgement.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)–

introduction

This function is intended to alert the driver if

his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the

driver is distracted or fatigued.

NOTE

The camera has certain limitations, see

page 156.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking

the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and

compares the direction of the road with the

driver’s movements of the steering wheel.

The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not

follow the lane smoothly.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly

changing driving pattern. It is primarily

intended to be used on main roads and is not

meant for use in city traffic.

WARNING

•DAC is not intended to extend the

duration of driving. Always plan breaks

at regular intervals to help remain alert.

•In certain cases, fatigue may not affect

the driver’s behavior. In situations of

this type, no warning will be provided.

Therefore, it is important to take

breaks at regular intervals, regardless

of whether or not DAC has given a

warning.

Limitations

In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-

ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has

not become erratic.

•if the driver is testing the LDW function

•in strong crosswinds

•on grooved road surfaces.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operating DAC

Settings are made using menu system and

the display in the center console. See page

201 for more information on the menu sys-

tem.

On/Off

To put Driver Alert in standby mode:

•In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car

settings Driver support systems

Driver Alert and check the box. If the box

is not checked, the function is off.

Function

Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle

exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will

remain active as long as the speed is over

approx. 37 mph (60 km/h).

If the vehicle is being driven errati-

cally, the driver will be alerted by an

audible signal and the message

Driver Alert Time for a break is

displayed. The warning will be repeated after

a short time if the driving pattern remains the

same.

Press the OK button to erase a message.

WARNING

•An alert should be taken seriously

since it is sometimes difficult for a

driver to realize that he/she is fatigued.

•In the event of a warning or if the

driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as

possible in a safe place and rest.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Symbols and messages

Instrument panel

Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of

the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message

remains in the display.

Center console display

SymbolAMessage Description

-Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

-Driver Alert Available The function is actived.

-Driver Alert Standby <65

km/h

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

-Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the

area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limita-

tions.

ASymboler .

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)–

introduction

This function is designed to help reduce the

risk of accidents in situations where the vehi-

cle leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving

off the road or into the opposite lane. LDW

consists of a camera that monitors the lane’s

side marker lines. The driver is alerted by an

audible signal if the vehicle crosses a side

marker line or the road’s center dividing line.

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing

the button on the center console. A light in

the button illuminates when the function is

on. This is supplemented by graphic displays

in the instrument panel, for example:

LDW displayed in the instrument panel

•The LDW symbol has white side marker

lines: the function is active and "sees"

one or both of the road's side marker

lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker

lines: the function is active but cannot

"see" one or both of the road's side

marker lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker

lines: the function is in standby mode

because the vehicle's speed is below

40 mph (65 km/h).

•The LDW symbol has no side marker

lines: – the function is deactivated.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for

each time the wheels cross a marker line.

No alarm will be given if a marker line is

between the wheels.

Limitations

The camera used by LDW has the same limi-

tations as the human eye. See page173 for

more information about the camera's limita-

tions.

NOTE

No warning signal will be given in the cer-

tain situations, such as:

•If the turn signal is being used

•The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1

•The accelerator pedal is pressed

quickly1

•If the steering wheel is moved quickly1

•In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s

body to sway

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be

made in the menu system by pressing My

Car. Go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Lane Departure

Warning.

There are two alternatives:

On at start-up: This selection switches LDW

on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,

the system will be in the mode that it was in

when the engine was switched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increa-

ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be

given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations

apply. When this setting is being used, the

system only needs to monitor lane marker

lines on one side of the vehicle to change sta-

tus to Lane Depart Warn Available.

1When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbols and messages

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/

Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

-Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

-Lane Depart. Warning Unavail-

able at this speed

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph

(65 km/h).

-Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See page 173 for

information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the

area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limi-

tations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the

message remains in the display.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

Introduction

The park assist system is designed to assist

you when driving into parking spaces,

garages, etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in

the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to meas-

ure the distance to a vehicle or an object that

may be close to the front or rear of your vehi-

cle. An audible signal and symbols in the

audio system’s display indicate the distance

to the object.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT

a safety system. This system is designed

to be a supplementary aid when parking

the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver's attention and judge-

ment.

Function

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when

the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the

button in the center console illuminates when

the system is on.

•The front park assist system is active

from the time the engine is started until

the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active

when the vehicle is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine

is running and reverse gear has been

selected.

Activating/deactivating

The system is activated automatically when

the vehicle is started.

–Press the Park assist button on the center

console to temporarily deactivate the sys-

tem(s).

> The indicator light in the button will go

out when the system has been deacti-

vated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivated

the next time the engine is started, or if the

button is pressed (the indicator light in the

button will illuminate).

NOTE

Park assist is disengaged automatically

when the parking brake is applied.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/

right rear)

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overview

of the vehicle’s position in relation to a

detected object.

The marked sectors in the display indicate

that one or more of the sensors has detected

an object. The closer the car symbol comes

to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the

object.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the

park assist system will not be able to provide

a visual indicator. An audible signal will still

be provided.

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent

tone that pulses faster as you come close to

an object, and becomes constant when you

are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an

object in front of or behind the vehicle. If

there are objects within this distance both

behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone

alternates between front and rear speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-

ered/raised with the infotainment volume

control. The level can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system. See page 201 for a

description of the menu system.

If the volume of another source from the

audio system is high, this will be automati-

cally lowered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal

comes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing

a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted

carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

NOTE

•Rear park assist is deactivated auto-

matically when towing a trailer if Volvo

genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non-

Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may

be necessary to switch off the system

manually, see page 183.

•The system will not detect high

objects, such as a loading dock, etc.

•Objects such as chains, thin shiny

poles or low objects may temporarily

not be detected by the system. This

may result in the pulsing tone unex-

pectedly stopping instead of changing

to a constant tone as the vehicle

approaches the object. In such cases,

use caution when backing up or stop

the vehicle to help avoid damage.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle

is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible

signal comes from the audio system's front

speakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary

headlights and front park assist since these

lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when the

parking brake is applied and or when the

gear selector is in the P position.

Faults in the system

If the information symbol illuminates and

Park assist syst Service required is shown

on the information display, this indicates that

the system is not functioning properly and

has been disengaged. Consult a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assist

system may give unexpected warning sig-

nals that can be caused by external sound

sources that use the same ultrasound fre-

quencies as the system. This may include

such things as the horns of other vehicles,

wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,

motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does

not indicate a fault in the system.

04 Driver support

Park assist*

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cleaning the sensors

G031402

Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and a suitable car washing deter-

gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may

cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,

snow, or ice, this could result in false

warning signals from the park assist sys-

tem.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

Introduction

The Park Assist Camera uses the display in

the center console to show the area behind

the car while you are backing up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-

screen image to indicate the direction that the

vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which

helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a

tight space or when attaching a trailer to the

vehicle.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•PAC is designed to be a supplemen-

tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is

not, however, intended to replace the

driver’s attention and judgment.

•The camera has blind spots where it

cannot detect objects or people

behind the vehicle.

•Pay particular attention to people or

animals that are close to the vehicle.

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle

and if a person or animal should suddenly

appear from the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the

opening handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that help

reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image

shown on the screen is as natural as possi-

ble. This may cause some objects on the

screen to “lean,” which is normal.

WARNING

Objects seen on the screen may be closer

than they appear to be.

Ambient lighting conditions

The camera automatically monitors the ambi-

ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and

constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This

may cause the brightness and quality of the

image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv-

ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in

bad weather, which may affect image quality.

If the image on the screen seems too dark,

brightness can be increased with the thumb

wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE

In order to function properly, the camera

lens should always be kept clean. This is

particularly important in bad weather.

Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Using PAC

Activation

PAC is activated when the gear selector is

moved to R if the system is selected in the

MY CAR menu system or by pressing the

CAM button in the center console. See page

201 for a description of the menu system.

If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in

use, PAC will automatically override the navi-

gation system to show the camera's image

on the screen instead of navigation informa-

tion, for as long as reverse gear is selected.

Zoom

The camera can be useful when attaching a

trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer

hitch (and press this button again to return to

the normal camera view).

With the camera zoomed in on the trailer

hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's path

toward the trailer will be projected. This fea-

ture can be activated in the MY CAR menu.

See page 201 for a description of the menu

system. The guiding lines for the wheels (see

the following section "Guiding lines") and for

the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the

same time.

If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed)

image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press

EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view.

Deactivation

Move the gear selector from R to another

position. There is a slight delay in the PAC

system, which means that the view from

behind the vehicle will remain on the screen

for approximately 15 seconds after the gear

selector has been moved from the R position

or until the vehicle reaches a forward speed

of 6 mph (10 km/h). The screen will then

revert to the mode that it was in before R was

selected and will, for example, display navi-

gation system information.

NOTE

If any button on the center console control

panel is pressed, the camera image will

disappear from the display. Pressing CAM

will return the camera image to the display.

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if

they were a path on the ground behind the

vehicle and are affected by the way in which

the steering wheel is turned. This enables the

driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if

he/she turns the steering wheel while backing

up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the guiding

lines show the path that the vehicle will

take, not the trailer.

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle.

The driver must always watch for people,

animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides

of the vehicle when turning while backing

up.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter)

zone behind the vehicle

Marker line for the clear back-up zone

"Wheel tracks"

The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft

(30 centimeters) of the rear bumper.

The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of

approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the

bumper. These lines also indicate the out-

most limits that any object (door mirrors, cor-

ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the

vehicle, even when it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side

marker lines show where the wheels will roll

and can extend up to approximately 10.5 ft

(3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are no

objects in the way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate dis-

tance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional

Park Assist system, the distance to an object

will be indicated more exactly and colored

markers in the display indicate which of the

sensor(s) has detected the object.

The markers change color (from yellow to

orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to

the object.

Marker (color) Distance to object

Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m)

Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Settings

Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view

is displayed and make the desired settings.

Parking camera settings

•Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines

while backing up.

•Mark Distance bars to display the inter-

secting lines while backing up.

Activating the system

•Mark Automatic activation of rear

camera to activate PAC each time

reverse gear is selected.

•Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.

Summary

•The camera is activated when the gear

selector is moved to R (this can be

04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

image is shown on the center console

display.

•When backing up, two solid lines are pro-

jected on the screen to show the path

that the vehicle's rear wheels will take.

These lines are affected by movements of

the steering wheel. The vehicle's approxi-

mate outer dimension are shown by two

dashed lines.

•The graphic lines will not be displayed

when backing up with a trailer that is con-

nected to the vehicle's electrical system.

•Objects on the ground that are closer

than 1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be

detected by the camera.

•The camera is active for approx.

5 seconds after the gear selector is

moved to R or until the vehicle's speed

exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

•The optional Park Assist sensors and the

parking camera work together and infor-

mation from the sensors is shown graphi-

cally on the display.

•The graphic lines shown on the screen

when the vehicle backs up can be disa-

bled in the settings menu.

•Manual zoom can be selected in the MY

CAR menu.

•The system can be switched off by press-

ing CAM. By default, the system is acti-

vated when the gear selector is moved to

R. This setting can be changed in the MY

CAR menu.

•If there are two cameras installed on the

vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn

TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to

be active), press CAM repeatedly or use

the center console controls. If the front

camera is on, it overrides the optional

park assist system's visual indicator but

there will still be an audible signal.

Limitations

Even if a fairly small section of the screen

image appears to be obstructed, this may

mean that a relatively large area behind the

vehicle is hidden and objects there may not

be detected until they are very near the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessories

mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the

camera's field of view.

Keep in mind

•Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice

and snow. Remove ice and snow care-

fully to avoid scratching the lens.

•Clean the lens regularly with warm water

and a suitable car washing detergent.

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

Introduction

BLIS is an information system that indicates

the presence of another vehicle moving in the

same direction as your vehicle on roads with

several lanes. The system helps provide infor-

mation about:

•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind

area"

•Vehicles that are about to pass your vehi-

cle in the left and/or right lanes

•Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supple-

mentary BLIS function intended to

detect vehicles crossing behind your

vehicle while you are backing up.

WARNING

•BLIS and CTA are information sys-

tems, NOT warning or safety systems

and do not function in all situations.

•BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the

need for you to visually confirm the

conditions around you, and the need

for you to turn your head and should-

ers to make sure that you can safely

change lanes or back up.

•As the driver, you have full responsibil-

ity for changing lanes/backing up in a

safe manner. Location of the BLIS indicator light1.

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates

on the side of the vehicle where the sys-

tem has detected another vehicle. If your

vehicle is passed on both sides at the

same time, both lights will illuminate.

BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine

is started; this is confirmed when the indica-

tor lights on the front door panels flash once.

1The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating/deactivating BLIS

Button for activating/deactivating BLIS

BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by

pressing the button on the center console.

The number or combinations of options on

the vehicle may not leave a space available

on the center console for the BLIS button. If

this is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/

reactivated in the MY CAR menu system (see

page 201)

•Select Off or On in Settings Car

settings BLIS.

When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the

indicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi-

cators will also flash once when the function

is reactivated) and a message will appear in

the instrument panel.

To erase the message:

•Press the OK button on the left steering

wheel lever

•Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the mes-

sage to disappear

When does BLIS function

Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing

vehicles

The system functions when your vehicle is

moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

BLIS is designed to react to:

•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind

area"

•Vehicles that are passing your vehicle

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a

passing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in

the door panel will glow steadily. If the driver

then uses the turn signal on the side on which

the warning is given, the indicator light will

flash and become brighter.

WARNING

•BLIS does not function in sharp

curves.

•BLIS does not function when your

vehicle is backing up.

Deactivating/reactivating CTA

On vehicles equipped with the optional Park

assist system (see page 183), Cross Traffic

Alert (CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated by

pressing the Park assist button on the center

console.

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

Park assist/CTA button

CTA can be deactivated separately in the MY

CAR menu system (see page 201

•Go to Settings Car settings BLIS

Cross Traffic Alert and deselect this

function to deactivate CTA. BLIS, how-

ever, is still activated.

When does CTA function

How CTA works

CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver

of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for

example, when backing out of a parking

space.

It is primarily designed to detect another vehi-

cle but in certain cases may also detect

pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy-

cles.

CTA is only activated when the vehicle is

backing up and is activated automatically

when the gear selector is put in reverse.

•An audible signal indicates that CTA has

detected something that is approaching

from the side. The signal will come from

either the left or right audio system

speakers, depending on which the side of

your vehicle the approaching vehicle/

object has been detected.

•CTA also provides a warning by illuminat-

ing the BLIS indicator lights.

•An icon will also illuminate in the Park

assist graphic on the center console dis-

play.

Limitations

CTA has limitations in certain situations, for

example, the CTA sensors cannot "see"

through other parked vehicles or obstruc-

tions.

The following are several examples where

CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited

and approaching vehicles cannot be detected

until they are too close:

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space

CTA's blind area

CTA's "field of vision"

In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on

one side

However, as you back your vehicle out of a

parking space, CTA's "field of vision"

expands.

Examples of other limitations include:

•Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors

may reduce the system's function or

make it impossible to detect other vehi-

cles or objects.

•Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the

surface of the sensors (see the illustration

in the following "Maintenance" section).

•BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's

wiring is connected to the vehicle's elec-

trical system.

Maintenance

Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors2

The BLIS/CTA sensors are located on the

inside of the rear fenders/bumper.

The surfaces in front of the sensors must be

kept clean for the system to function opti-

mally.

CAUTION

Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems should

only be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

2Generic illustration

04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

Messages

If BLIS/CTA are not functioning normally, a

symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel

and a text message will be displayed. Follow

any instructions that may be provided.

These messages include:

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched off

manually. BLIS remains

active.

BLIS and

CTA OFF

Trailer

attached

BLIS and CTA are tempo-

rarily deactivated because

a trailer's wiring has been

connected to the vehicle's

electrical system.

BLIS and

CTA Serv-

ice required

BLIS and CTA are not

functioning normally.

•If this message recurs,

the systems should be

inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Messages can be erased by pressing the OK

button on the left steering wheel lever.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Sensus........................................................................................ 198

Menus and messages........................................................................... 199

The MY CAR menus.............................................................................. 201

Climate system..................................................................................... 207

Trip computer........................................................................................ 216

Active chassis system–Four C*............................................................. 223

Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 224

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

Center console control panel

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:

see the separate VNS manual for operat-

ing instructions.

Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see

page 230 .

Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see

page 201.

Park assist camera - CAM*: see

page 187.

Climate system: see page 207.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your

vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a

number of functions such as the individual-

ized settings that can be made in the MY

CAR menus, the climate and infotainment

systems as well as other options such as the

park assist camera(s), etc.

Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center

instrument panel to display information and

selections are made using this panel’s con-

trols and buttons. Certain features can also

be controlled using the steering wheel key-

pad.

Press MY CAR to present all of the available

settings related to driving and/or controlling

the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the

clock, lock settings, etc.

Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM*

to change a source and to activated systems

or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD,

Bluetooth, navigation* and the park assist

camera *.

See the respective sections in this manual for

more detailed information about your vehi-

cle's various features and functions.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

Main instrument panel

Analog Instrument panel and menu controls

Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls

OK: access to the list of messages and

message confirmation.

Thumb wheel: browse among menus and

options in the list of functions.

RESET: reset the active function. Used in

certain cases to select/activate a func-

tion, see the explanation under each

respective function.

The menus shown on the information displays

in the instrument panel are controlled with the

left lever. The menus displayed depend on

ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message

and return to the menus.

Menu overview

The following menu alternatives may vary,

depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle.

Analog instrument panel

Digital speed

Trip comp. opt.

Service status

Messages (##)1

Digital instrument panel*

Settings

Themes

Contrast mode/Color mode

Service status

Messages

Trip computer reset

1Number of messages in parentheses

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

200

Messages

When a warning, information or indicator

symbol comes on, a corresponding message

appears in the information panel. An error

message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among

the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you

are using the trip computer, the message

must be read and confirmed by pressing

OK before the previous activity can be

resumed.

Message Description

Stop

engineA

Stop and switch off the

engine as soon as possi-

ble. Serious risk of dam-

age. Contact an author-

ized Volvo workshop.

Stop safelyAStop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Contact an

authorized Volvo work-

shop.

Message Description

Service

urgentA

Have the vehicle checked

by an authorized Volvo

workshop immediately.

Service

requiredA

Have the vehicle checked

by an authorized Volvo

workshop as soon as pos-

sible.

See man-

ualA

Read the owner's manual.

Book time

for mainte-

nance

Time to book service at an

authorized Volvo retailer.

Time for

regular

mainte-

nance

Time for regular service at

an authorized Volvo work-

shop. The timing is deter-

mined by the number of

miles driven, number of

months since the last

service, engine running

time.

Message Description

Mainte-

nance over-

due

If the service intervals are

not followed, the warranty

does not cover any dam-

aged parts. Contact an

authorized Volvo work-

shop for service.

Temporarily

OFFA

A function has been tem-

porarily switched off and

is reset automatically while

driving or after starting

again.

Low battery

Power save

mode

The audio system is

switched off to save cur-

rent. Charge the battery.

AThere will also be a system-specific part of this message

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

}}

201

Introduction

The menu system provides access to

menus for operating many of the vehi-

cle's functions, such as setting the

clock, door mirrors, locks, etc.

Navigating in the menus is done using the

buttons on the center console control panel

or with the right-side steering wheel keypad.

Some of the features mentioned in this sec-

tion are optional.

Operation

Center console controls

Center console controls for menu navigation

Press MY CAR to access the My Car

menus.

Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted

selection or to store a certain function in

the system's memory.

Turn to navigate up/down among menu

selections.

EXIT

EXIT functions

The results of a short press on EXIT vary,

depending on where the cursor is and where

you are in the menu structure.

•Reject and incoming phone call

•The current function will be cancelled

•Characters that have been entered will be

erased

•The most recent selection will be cancel-

led

•Go back (upward) in the menu system

A long press will take you to the highest

menu level (the main view), giving you access

to all of the vehicles/menus. See page 231

for additional information.

Steering wheel keypad

The keypad varies according to the vehicle's

equipment

Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down

among menu selections. Press the thumb

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

202

wheel to make a selection or store a func-

tion in the system's memory.

EXIT.

Paths

The current menu level is displayed at the

upper right of the center console display.

Menu paths are displayed as follows, for

example:

Settings Car settings Lock settings

Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a

function in the menu system:

1. Press the MY CAR button on the center

console control panel.

2. Navigate to a menu, for example

Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and

press it to open a submenu.

3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as

Car settings.

4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the

thumb wheel to open a new submenu.

5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the

thumb wheel to open a submenu with

alternatives that can be selected.

6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the

desired choice and press the thumb

wheel to put an X in the box.

7. Finish by exiting the menu system either

one step at a time with short presses on

EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to

return to the main menu.

The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in

the center console can be used in the same

way.

MY CAR

When the MY CAR symbol has been

selected, the following menu alternatives are

displayed.

•My XC60

•Trip statistics

•Support systems

•Settings

My XC60

MY CAR My XC60

The display shows all of the vehicle's driver

support systems, which can be activated/

deactivated here.

Trip statistics

MY CAR Trip statistics

Information from previous trips is stored and

can be displayed in the form of a bar chart,

see page 221

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
 The MY CAR menus
05
}}
203
Driver support systems
MY CAR Support systems
(MY CAR > Support systems)
The screen shows the current status (set-
tings) for the vehicle's driver support sys-
tems.
Menu settings
The following pages list the main menus/
submenus and possible selections.
Car key memory
See pages 92 and 59 for more information.
Lock settings
Automatic door locking
Doors unlock
All doors
Driver door, then all
Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same side
Both front doors
Audible confirmation
See page 59 and 67 for more information.
Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror
Tilt right mirror
See page 112 for more information.
Light settings
Door lock confirmation light
Unlock confirmation light
See page 59 for more information.
Approach light duration
Off
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
See page 61 for more information.
Home safe light duration
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
See page 105 for more information.
Triple indicator
See page 104 for more information.
Daytime running lights
See page 100 for more information.
Active bending lights
See page 102 for more information.
Tire pressure system
Warns if tyre pressure is too low
Calibrate tire pressure
See page 322 for more information. This sys-
tem is optional in Canada.
Steering wheel force
High

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus 
05
204
Medium
Low
See page 223 for more information.
Reset car settings
This feature returns the "Car settings" menu
to the original factory settings.
MY CAR Settings Driver support
systems
Collision Warning
Collision Warning
Warning distance
Long
Normal
Short
Warning sound
See page 171 for more information.
Lane Departure Warning
Lane Departure Warning
On at start-up
Increased sensitivity
See page 180 for more information.
Road Sign Information
On
Off
Speed alert
On
Off
DSTC
See page 142 for more information.
City Safety
See page 163 for more information.
BLIS
See page 191 for more information.
Distance Alert
See page 160 for more information.
Driver Alert
See page 177 for more information.
MY CAR Settings System options
Set/change time
See page 87 for more information.
Time format
12 h
24 h
Screen saver
The contents of the screen are replaced by
another image if this selection is marked. The
contents of the screen will be displayed again
if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see
page 201.
Uncheck the selection to turn the screen
saver off.
Language
Select the language for menu texts.
Show help text
This displays help texts for the current menu.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

}}

205

See page 216 for more information about the

trip computer.

Temperature unit

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Select the temperature scale to be displayed

by the climate control unit.

Volume levels

Voice output volume

Front park assist volume

Rear park assist volume

Phone ringing volume

Reset system options

This feature returns the "System options"

menu to the original factory settings.

MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA.

AOnly on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System

Voice tutorial

Select this menu alternative and press OK for

spoken information about how the system

works.

Voice command list

Phone commands

Phone

Phone call contact

Phone dial number

Navigation commands

Navigation

Navigation repeat instruction

Navigation go to address

General commands

Help

Cancel

Voice tutorial

The menu alternatives under Phone

commands show examples of the voice

commands available when a cell phone is

connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free sys-

tem. See page 268 for more detailed infor-

mation.

The menu alternatives under Navigation

commands show examples of the voice

commands available for the optional Volvo

Navigation System. Refer to the navigation

system's manual for detailed information.

Voice user setting

Default setting

User 1

User 2

Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if

more than one person uses voice commands

regularly. Default setting resets the factory

settings.

Voice training

User 1

User 2

Voice training enables the system to

become familiar with the driver's voice and

pronunciation. A list of phrases is presented

on the screen for the driver to read aloud.

When the system has registered the driver's

pronunciation, no additional phrases will be

displayed. After completed voice training,

select User 1 or User 2 in Voice user

setting to set the system to the current user.

Voice output volume

•A volume control will be displayed. To set

the volume level:

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

206

1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel

2. Test the setting by pressing OK

3. Store the setting and leave the menu by

pressing EXIT.

Voice POI list

Edit list

The navigation system has a large number of

points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30

POIs can be stored in this list.

The menu alternative Voice POI list is only

displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the

optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to

the navigation system's manual for detailed

information.

MY CAR Settings Audio settings

See page 230 for more information about the

infotainment system.

MY CAR Settings Climate settings

Automatic blower adjustment

Normal

High

Low

Recirculation timer

Automatic rear defroster

Interior air quality system

Reset climate settings

This feature returns the "Climate settings"

menu to the original factory settings.

For more information about the climate sys-

tem, see page 207.

MY CAR Settings Favourites (FAV)

See page 235 for more information about

this feature.

MY CAR Settings Information

Number of keys

See page 58 for more information.

VIN number

See page 367 for more information.

DivX® VOD code

See page 252 for more information.

Bluetooth software version in car

See page 239 for more information.

Map and software version

Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System

manual for more information.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207

Introduction

Air conditioning

The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli-

mate Control (ECC). The climate control sys-

tem cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the

passenger compartment.

NOTE

•The air conditioning can be switched

off, but to ensure the best possible cli-

mate comfort in the passenger com-

partment and to prevent the windows

from misting, it should always be on.

•In warm weather, a small amount of

water may accumulate under the car

when it has been parked. This water is

condensation from the A/C system

and is normal.

Sensor location

•The sunlight sensor is located on the top

side of the dashboard.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors which side of

the car that is most exposed to sunlight.

This can mean that the temperature may

differ between the right and left-side air

vents, even if the temperatures set for both

sides of the passenger compartment are

the same.

•The temperature sensor for the passen-

ger compartment is located below the cli-

mate control panel.

•The outside (ambient) temperature sensor

is located on the door mirror.

•The humidity sensor* is located in the

interior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with

clothing or other objects.

Side windows and laminated panoramic

roof

To ensure that the air conditioning works

optimally, the side windows, and the lamina-

ted panoramic roof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windows

The defroster function should be used to

remove fog or mist from the inside of the win-

dows. Keeping the windows clean with a

commercially available window washing

spray will also help prevent fogging or mist-

ing.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-

gaged during full acceleration or when driving

uphill with a trailer. This may result in a tem-

porary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base of

the windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required to

maintain and carry out repairs on the climate

system. Work of this type should only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The air

conditioning system in your car contains a

CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance

will not deplete the ozone layer. The air con-

ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of

R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

208

Passenger compartment filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at

the recommended intervals. Please refer to

your Warranty and Service Records Informa-

tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for these intervals.

The filter should be replaced more often when

driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The

filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should

always be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.

Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles

in the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev-

els of odors and contaminants entering the

vehicle. The air quality sensor detects

increased levels of contaminants in the out-

side air. When the air quality sensor detects

contaminated outside air, the air intake closes

and the air inside the passenger compart-

ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters

the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated

passenger compartment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air fil-

ter replacement intervals.

Materials used in the cabin

The materials used in the cabin have been

developed to help minimize the amount of

dust and make the cabin easier to keep

clean. All floor mats can be easily removed

for cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec-

ommended by Volvo. See also the informa-

tion beginning on page 361.

Menu settings

The default settings for four of the climate

system's functions can be changed in the

menu system.

•Blower speed in automatic mode.

•Recirculation timer for passenger com-

partment air.

•Automatic rear window defrosting.

•The optional Interior Air Quality System

(IAQS).

The functions can also be returned to factory

settings in the menu system.

See page 201 for a description of the menu

system.

Air distribution

The incoming air is distributed from a number

of different vents in the passenger compart-

ment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode.

If desired, air distribution can be controlled

manually, see page 215.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

}}

209

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-

ment to help maintain the desired tempera-

ture in the rear seat.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side

Heated driver's seat*

Defroster (maximum effect), electrically

heated windshield*

Blower

Manual air distribution—floor

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—defroster

Heated rear window and door mirrors,

see page 113

Heated front passenger's seat*

Temperature control, passenger's side

Recirculation

AUTO

A/C on/off

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

Climate system controls

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature setting is shown in

the center console display

Press the lower section of

the button repeatedly until

the desired number of indi-

cator lights illuminate:

Highest heat level – three

indicator lights.

Medium heat level – two indicator lights.

Lowest heat level – one indicator light.

If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat

heating is switched off.

Seat heating will automatically switch off

when the engine is switched off.

Starting the seat heating automatically

This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at

the highest level) automatically when the

engine is started if the ambient temperature is

below approx. 45° F (7° C).

Activate/deactivate this function in the

MY CAR menu system, under Settings

Climate settings Auto start driver seat

heater.

Heated rear seats*1

Heat control for the outboard seating posi-

tions is done in the same way as for the front

seats.

Blower control

Turn the control clockwise to

increase or counterclockwise

to decrease the blower

speed. If AUTO is selected,

blower speed will be regula-

ted automatically and this

will override manual adjust-

ment.

NOTE

If the blower is turned off completely, the

air conditioning is disengaged, which may

result in fogging on the windows.

1Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

212

Air distribution

Manual air distribution—defroster

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When a

button is pressed, the corresponding figure

will appear in the display with an arrow indi-

cating which manual air flow has been

selected (see the following illustration). See

also the air distribution chart on page 215.

Air distribution is shown in the center console

display

Auto

The function automatically

regulates cooling, heating,

blower speed, recirculation,

and air distribution to main-

tain the chosen temperature.

If you select one or more

manual functions, the other

functions continue to be controlled automati-

cally. The air quality sensor is engaged and all

manual settings are switched off when AUTO

is pressed. The display shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be set

under Climate settings Automatic blower

adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal

or High.

NOTE

Selecting the lowest blower speed may

increases the risk of fog forming on the

windows.

Temperature control

The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set separately. When

the vehicle is started, the

most recent setting is

resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up

by selecting a higher/lower temperature

than the actual temperature required.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213

A/C – ON/OFF

When the indicator light in

the button is on, the air con-

ditioning is controlled auto-

matically. This cools/heats

and dehumidifies the incom-

ing air. When the indicator

light in the button is off, the

air conditioning is disengaged. Other func-

tions are still controlled automatically. When

maximum defroster is selected, the air condi-

tioning system is set for maximum blower

speed and dehumidifies the cabin as quickly

as possible.

Max. defroster and electrically heated

windshield*

The selected settings are shown in the center

console display

Electrical heating*

Max. defroster

Models without an electrically heated wind-

shield

•Press the button once to start

defrosting/de-icing the windshield and

front side windows. The indicator light (2)

in the defroster button illuminates when

the function is active.

•Press the button twice to switch off the

defroster (the indicator light will switch

off).

Models with an electrically heated wind-

shield*

•If this feature is switched off, press the

button once to start heating the wind-

shield2. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the

center console display.

•Press the button twice to start both the

defroster and the windshield heating.

Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the

center console display.

•If these features are on, press the button

to switch them off. The symbols will no

longer be displayed.

2If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see page 115.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

•Triangular areas at the far sides of the

windshield are not heated electrically

and will take slightly longer to

defrost/de-ice.

•The heated windshield may affect the

performance/range of e.g., transpond-

ers used to automatically pay highway

tolls or other communication equip-

ment.

The following occurs when the defroster/

windshield heating functions have been acti-

vated:

•Blower speed increases automatically

and the air conditioning will switch on (if

not already on and if the passenger com-

partment blower is not turned off) to

dehumidify the air in the passenger com-

partment. Air conditioning can be

switched off by pressing the AC button.

•Recirculation will not function while

defrost is engaged.

The climate system will return to its previous

settings when the defroster/windshield heat-

ing function is switched off.

See also page 113 for additional information.

Recirculation/air quality system

Recirculation

This function can be used to

shut out exhaust fumes,

smoke, etc., from the pas-

senger compartment. The air

in the passenger compart-

ment is then recirculated,

i.e., no air from outside the

car is taken into the car when this function is

activated. The indicator light in the button will

illuminate when recirculation is selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,

there is a risk of condensation forming on the

insides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer

The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-

ging, or stale air when the recirculation func-

tion is selected by automatically switching off

the function after a certain length of time,

depending on the ambient temperature. Acti-

vate/deactivate the function under Climate

settings Recirculation timer. See page

201 for a description of the menu system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is

always deactivated.

Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*

This system consists of a multifilter and an air

quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases

and particles from the incoming air, thereby

reducing the amounts of odors and contami-

nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen-

sor detects increased levels of contaminants

in the outside air. When the air quality sensor

detects contaminated outside air, the air

intake closes and the air inside the passenger

compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside

air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans

recirculated passenger compartment air.

When the AUTO button is depressed the air

quality sensor is always engaged.

Activate or deactivate this function in Climate

settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

•The air quality sensor should always

be engaged in order to obtain the best

air in the passenger compartment.

•Recirculation is limited in cold weather

to avoid fogging.

•If the insides of the windows start fog-

ging, disengage the air quality sensor.

Use the defroster function to increase

airflow to the front, side, and rear win-

dows.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

215

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the dashboard air

vents. The air is not recircula-

ted. Air conditioning is always

engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-

ice the front side win-

dows and windshield

quickly.

Air to the floor and

windows. Some air

flows from the dash-

board air vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good de-

fogging in cold or humid

weather.

Air to windshield and side win-

dows. Some air flows from the

air dashboard vents.

In cold or humid

weather (blower

speed should be

moderate to high).

Air to floor and from

dashboard air vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and from

dashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-

fort in warm, dry

weather.

Air to floor. Some air

flows to the dashboard

air vents and windows.

To warm or cool the

feet.

Airflow to the head and chest

from the dashboard air vents.

To ensure efficient

cooling in warm

weather.

Airflow to windows,

from dashboard air

vents and to the floor.

To cool the feet or pro-

vide warmer air to the

upper body in cold

weather or hot, dry

weather.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

216

Introduction

The content and appearance of the trip com-

puter varies depending on whether the vehi-

cle is equipped with an analog or digital

instrument panel.

The instrument panel illuminates as soon as

the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer set-

tings can be made. If none of the trip com-

puter's controls are used within 30 seconds

after the driver's door has been opened, the

instrument panel lighting will go out and the

trip computer cannot be used again until:

•the ignition is put in mode II1

•the engine is started

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you

are using the trip computer, this message

must be acknowledged in order to return

to the trip computer function. Acknowl-

edge a message by pressing OK.

Trip computer in models with an

analog instrument panel

The trip computer has two different menu

groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Information display and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase

a message

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of

trip computer information headings and

to scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-

tion after a selection has been made

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip com-

puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice

by pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the analog trip com-

puter's functions:

1See page 89 for information about the various ignition modes.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

}}

217

Function Description

Digital speed

– km/h

– mph

– None

This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel

•Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing

ENTER.

Trip comp. opt.

– Distance to empty

– Fuel consumption

– Average speed

– Trip odometer T1 and total dist.

– Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already

been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and are

displayed in gray:

1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.

2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.

3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see page 199.

Information headings

Any of the information headings in the follow-

ing table can be displayed. To do so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-

ing the information headings. Stop on the

desired heading.

3. See the table for an explanation of the

heading or the actions that can be taken.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

218

Information headings in the instrument

panel

Description

Trip odometer T1 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Trip odometer T2 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Distance to empty See Distance to empty on page 220.

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption.

Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of infor-

mation headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information

headings at any time by turning the thumb

wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Trip computer in models with a digital

instrument panel

The trip computer has two different menu

groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Information displays and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or to activate a selection

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of

trip computer information headings and

to scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-

tion after a selection has been made

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip com-

puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice

by pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the digital trip com-

puter's functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset

– Average fuel consumption

– Average speed

NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see page 221 for a description of how this is done.

Messages For additional information, see page 199.

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see page 80.

Settings*Select Auto On or Off.

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings

Three trip computer headings can be dis-

played at the same time; one in each of the

displays (see the previous illustration). One of

the combinations of information headings in

the following table can be displayed. To do

so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-

ing the combinations of information head-

ings. Stop on the desired combination.

3. See the table for an explanation of the

heading or the actions that can be taken.

Scroll among the combinations of trip com-

puter information headings at any time by

turning the thumb wheel until the desired

combination is displayed.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heading combinations Description

Average fuel consumption Trip odometer T1 + mileage Average speed •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mileage Distance to empty •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>kmh Change between mph<>kmh – see "Digital speed display" on

page 220.

- No trip computer informa-

tion displayed

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin-

ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information

headings at any time by turning the thumb

wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Supplementary information

Average fuel consumption

Fuel consumption since the last time this

function was reset.

Average speed

The vehicle's average speed since the last

time this function was reset.

Current fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption is calculated

approximately once a second. When the vehi-

cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption

is displayed per unit of time. At higher

speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.

Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the

heading "Changing units" on page 221

Distance to empty

This function shows the approximate dis-

tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining

in the tank. When Distance to empty shows

"----", there is very little useable fuel remain-

ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on average fuel con-

sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of

driving and the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary

if your driving style changes). An economical

driving style will generally increase this dis-

tance.

See page 274 for information about driving

economically.

Digital speed display*

Speed is expressed in the unit not used by

the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if

the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip

computer will display in the speed in km/h

and vice versa.

Resetting an analog instrument panel

Trip odometer(s) and average speed

1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver-

age speed.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected

function is reset.

Each trip computer heading must be reset

individually.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

Resetting a digital instrument panel

Trip odometer

1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the com-

bination of headings containing the trip

odometer to be reset.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip

odometer is reset.

Average speed and fuel consumption

1. Select Trip computer reset and press

OK.

2. Select one of the following alternatives

using the thumb wheel and press OK:

•mpg

•mph

•Reset both

3. Finish by pressing RESET.

Changing units

To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas-

ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR

Settings System options Distance

and fuel units.

NOTE

In addition to changing units in the trip

computer, this also changes the units used

in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.

Trip statistics*

Trip information from previous trips regarding

average fuel consumption and average speed

is stored and can be displayed in the form of

a bar chart.

Function

Trip statistics2

Each bar represents a driving distance of

1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current

scale; the bar at the far right shows the value

for the current mile/10 miles.

Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and

10 miles; the marker at the right will also

change according to the scale selected.

Settings

Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu

system as follows:

MY CAR My XC60 Trip statistics:

•Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all

pervious statistics. Exit the menu by

pressing EXIT.

•Reset for every driving cycle: select by

pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by press-

ing EXIT.

Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era-

ses all trip statistics automatically if the igni-

tion is switched off for at least 4 hours. When

the engine is restarted, new statistics will be

stored.

To get new statistics if the engine is restarted

before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing

ones have to be erased manually by selecting

Start new trip.

For additional information, see page 199.

2The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

222

See also the information about Eco Guide on

page 132.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

Active chassis (Four C)

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con-

trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha-

racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the

car's driving characteristics can be adjusted.

There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and

Advanced.

NOTE

This system is available on Canadian mod-

els only.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride

and the transmission shifts gears at lower

rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for

long-distance highway driving. The indicator

light in the button will be on when this mode

is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is

reduced during cornering and steering

response is more immediate. The transmis-

sion shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driv-

ing. The indicator light in the button will be on

to indicate that Sport mode has been

selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal

and steering response is very direct. Gear

shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for

dynamic and active driving.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated the next

time the engine is started.

Speed-dependent steering force*

Steering force increases with the speed of the

vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in

order to facilitate parking, etc.

Steering force can be changed under MY

CAR Car settings Steering wheel

force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a

description of the menu system, see

page 201.

NOTE

This steering force level menu function

cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in

motion.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

224

Storage spaces

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the

front seat cushions

Glove compartment

Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and

AUX input/USB connector*

Jacket holder

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Jacket holder

The jacket hanger is located on the inboard

side of the front passenger's seat head

restraint. It is only intended for hanging light

garments.

Tunnel console

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.)

under armrest, AUX input/USB connec-

tor.

Includes cup holder for driver and pas-

senger, 12-volt socket and a small stor-

age compartment.

Glove compartment

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here. There are also holders for pens and fuel

cards. The glove compartment can be locked

manually with the key blade, see page 71.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

226

Vanity mirror

G021438

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when the

cover is lifted.

12-volt sockets

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt

accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

ignition must be in at least mode I, see

page 88.

The maximum current consumption is 10A

(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in

the passenger compartment is in use. If both

the front and rear sockets are used at the

same time, the maximum current consump-

tion per socket is 7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to

power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette

lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when

not in use.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the cargo area pro-

vides electrical current even when the igni-

tion is switched off. Using the socket while

the engine is not running will drain the bat-

tery.

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction........................................................................................... 230

Radio..................................................................................................... 240

Media player......................................................................................... 249

AUX/USB sockets................................................................................. 254

Bluetooth® media ................................................................................. 257

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...................................................... 259

Cell phone voice control*...................................................................... 268

INFOTAINMENT

06 Infotainment

Introduction

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

The infotainment system consists of radio

and media player features and also makes it

possible to communicate via a cell phone.

The information is displayed on a 7" screen in

the center console. Infotainment functions

can be controlled from the center console or

via the buttons on the steering wheel keypad.

On models equipped with the navigation sys-

tem*, voice commands can also be used to

e.g., set destinations, make calls from a

Bluetooth®-connected cell phone, etc.

If the infotainment system was on when the

ignition was switched off, the most recently

used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next

time the ignition is put in mode I or higher.

The driver's door must also be closed on

vehicles with keyless drive*.

The infotainment system can be operated for

15 minutes at a time while the engine is

switched off by pressing the On/Off button.

While the engine is being started, the infotain-

ment system will be temporarily interrupted

and will resume when the engine has started.

NOTE

To help avoid excessive battery drain,

remove the remote key from the ignition

slot if the infotainment system is used

while the engine is switched off.

Dolby Pro Logic

The system is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

Audyssey MultEQ1

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used

to optimize sound quality to help ensure a

world-class listening experience.

1Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

Infotainment system overview

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX

and USB)

Steering wheel keypad

7" display

Center console control panel

Rear seat control panel with headphone

socket*

Not in use

Basic infotainment functions

Corresponding controls - steering wheel keypad

and center console

Left/right arrow keys – short press

moves between preset radio stations, tracks

on a disc or chapters on a DVD. Press and

hold to search within tracks or to tune to the

next/previous available radio station.

SOUND – press to access the menu for

adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 235 for

additional information.

VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume

level.

ON/OFF/MUTE – short press - switch

the system ON. Press and hold (until the

screen turns black) - switch the system

OFF. A short press when the infotainment

system is on will mute/unmute the sound.

The entire infotainment system, including the

navigation* and telephone functions, is

switched on/off at the same time by using

this button.

CD/DVD* slot.

Mode buttons – select a mode (e.g.,

RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its

button on the center console. The most

recent source in the selected mode (e.g.,

FM1 in RADIO mode) will be displayed. In

TEL or NAV* modes, pressing the respective

source button will display a shortcut menu.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Eject a disc.

OK/MENU – press the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad or this button on

the center console to confirm a menu selec-

tion or accept an incoming phone call. From

RADIO or MEDIA mode's main view, press-

ing this button displays a menu for the

selected source. Arrows at the right of the

screen indicate submenus.

TUNE – turn the thumb wheel on the

steering wheel keypad or this button on the

center console to scroll among tracks/folders,

radio stations, phone contacts or to navigate

among the alternatives shown on the screen.

EXIT – short press - go upward in the

menu system, cancel a current function,

reject an incoming phone call or erase char-

acters that have been entered on the screen.

Press and hold - to go to the mode's main

view. From a mode’s main view, pressing and

holding EXIT takes you to the infotainment

system's main view, which enables you to

access the same modes as by pressing the

respective mode keys on the center console.

# INFO – if more information is available

than is currently displayed on the screen,

press # INFO to display the remaining infor-

mation.

Keypad for entering text/numbers, storing

radio stations, etc.

* FAV – this button can be used to store a

shortcut to a commonly used function in

AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section "*

FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 235 for

information on using this button.

MUTE (models without the navigation sys-

tem*) – press to mute/unmute infotainment

system sound.

Voice control (models with the navigation

system*) – press to activate voice commands

(for Bluetooth®-connected cell phones and

the navigation system*).

06 Infotainment

Introduction

}}

233

Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

06 Infotainment

Introduction

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA

button). The number of buttons varies,

depending on your vehicle’s specifica-

tions). Each mode has four basic views:

Normal view

Shortcut view

Quick scroll view

Menu view

Select a mode by pressing its button (1)

(RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using

TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.

Rear control panel with headphone

sockets*

Headphones with an impedance of

16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or

higher are recommended for best sound

reproduction.

Volume control (right/left sides)

Scroll/search forward and back

MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD

Radio2, SAT1*, SAT2*, Disc, USB, iPod,

Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF.

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating

The control panel is activated by pressing

MODE when the infotainment system is

switched on. It is switched off automatically

when the infotainment system is switched off

or by a long press on MODE.

Scroll/search forward and back

Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD

tracks/audio files or to search for the next

available radio station.

Limitations

NOTE

•The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc,

etc.) being played through the infotain-

ment system's speakers cannot be

controlled from the rear control panel.

•In order to select and play an external

device using MODE, the device must

be connected to the infotainment sys-

tem.

2U.S. models only.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

* FAV—storing a shortcut

The * FAV button can be used to store fre-

quently used functions, making it possible to

start the stored function by simply press-

ing * FAV. One favorite (for example,

Equalizer) can be programmed for each of

the following infotainment system functions:

In RADIO mode

•AM

•FM1/FM2

•SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2*

In MEDIA mode

•DISC

•USB

•iPod

•Bluetooth

•AUX

Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR,

CAM* and NAV*. See page 201 for a descrip-

tion of the menu system.

To program a function on the * FAV button:

1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA,

etc.).

2. Select e.g., a waveband (FM1, etc.) or

source (Disc), etc.

3. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite"

menu is displayed.

4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

alternatives displayed and press OK/

MENU to confirm (store) your choice.

> The next time the infotainment system

mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is

selected, a short press on * FAV will

start the stored function.

Basic sound settings

Press SOUND to display the basic sound set-

ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue

pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the

other setting alternatives.

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save

the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to

display:

•Surround:3 Can be set to On or Off.

When switched on, the system will auto-

matically select settings for the best

sound quality, which is normally DPLII

and will appear in the display. If the

recording was made using Dolby Digital

technology, playback will be provided

with this setting and will appear

in the display. If Surround is switched off,

audio will be provided using 3 channel

stereo.

•Bass: Bass level.

•Treble: Treble level.

•Fader: Balance between the front and

rear speakers.

•Balance: Balance between the right and

left speakers.

3Premium Sound Multimedia only

06 Infotainment

Introduction

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level.

•DPL II centre level/3 channel centre

level3: Volume for the center speaker.

•DPL II surround level3/4: Surround level.

Advanced sound settings

Equalizer

Sound levels for different frequencies can be

adjusted separately using this feature.

To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio

settings and select Equalizer

2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequen-

cies and press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting

and confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU. Do the same for the other fre-

quencies.

4. When you have finished making your set-

tings, press EXIT to save and return to

normal view.

For general information regarding menu navi-

gation, see page 233 and menu overview see

page 237.

Sound stage5

The sound experience can be optimized for

the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear

seat. If the front and rear seats are occupied,

the sound stage setting Front seats is rec-

ommended. Select one of the options under

Audio settings Sound stage.

Audio volume and automatic volume

control

The infotainment system compensates for

disrupting noises in the passenger compart-

ment by increasing the volume according to

the speed of the vehicle. The level of sound

compensation can be set at low, medium,

high or off. Select the level under Audio

settings Volume compensation.

External audio source volume

If an external device such as an MP3 player

or an iPod ® is connected to the AUX socket,

the device's volume may be different than the

volume of the internal sound sources such as

the disc player or the radio. If the external

sound source's volume is too high, the quality

of the sound may be impaired. To help pre-

vent this, adjust the input volume of the exter-

nal audio source:

NOTE

Sound quality may be affected if the MP3

player is being charged while the system is

in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid

charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt

socket while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.

Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX

input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.

Optimal sound reproduction

The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for

optimal sound reproduction using digital sig-

nal processing.

This calibration takes into account factors

such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-

tics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for

each combination of vehicle/infotainment

system.

3Premium Sound Multimedia only

4Only when Surround is on.

5Premium Sound Multimedia only

06 Infotainment

Introduction

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

There is also a dynamic calibration that takes

into consideration the volume level, radio

reception, and the speed of the vehicle.

The settings that are described in this man-

ual, (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only

intended to enable the user to adapt sound

reproduction to his/her personal tastes.

Infotainment system menus

RADIO menus

Main AM menu

AM menu

Show presets6

Scan

Audio settings7

Sound stage8

Equalizer9

Volume compensation

Reset all audio settings

Main FM1/FM2 menu

FM menu

Show radio text

Show presets

Scan

Advanced settings

Reset all FM settings

Audio settings7

Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM™

satellite radio)

SAT1

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO

button to activate SIRIUS.

SAT2

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO

button to activate SIRIUS.

Song memory

Add song

Song Seek

Delete song

View song memory

Channel list information

Station name

Artist

Title

Information

Show presets

Category list

Advanced SIRIUS settings

Skip options

Channel skip list

Lock options

Channel lock list

Unlock all channels

Temporarily

unlock all channels

Change code

Audio settings7

6High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only.

7The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

8Premium Sound Multimedia only.

9To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

238

MEDIA menus

Main CD Audio menu

Disc menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings7

Main CD/DVD10 Data menu

Disc menu

Play/Pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings7

Main DVD10 Video menu

DVD Video Menu

DVD disc menu

Play/Pause/Continue

Stop

Subtitles

Audio tracks

Advanced settings

Angle

DivX® VOD code

Audio settings7

Main iPod menu

iPod menu

Random

Scan

Audio settings7

Main USB menu

USB menu

Play/Pause

Stop

Random

Repeat folder

Select USB device

Change subtitles

Change audio track

Scan

Audio settings7

Main AUX menu

AUX menu

AUX input volume

Audio settings7

TEL menus

Main Bluetooth media menu

Bluetooth menu

Random

Change device

Remove Bluetooth device

Scan

Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings7

7The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

10The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion.

06 Infotainment

Introduction

239

Main Bluetooth® hands-free menu

Phone menu

Call lists

All calls

Missed calls

Answered calls

Dialled calls

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Speed dials

Receive vCard

Memory status

Clear phone book

Change phone

Remove Bluetooth device

Phone settings

Discoverable

Sounds and volume

Download phone book

Bluetooth software

version in car

Call options

Auto answer

Voicemail number

Disconnect phone

06 Infotainment

Radio

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General functions

RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1,

FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands.

Keypad (buttons 0-9)

Navigate among the menu alternatives in

the display by turning TUNE or the thumb

wheel on the steering wheel keypad.

Confirm your selection or access the

radio menus by pressing OK/MENU or

the thumb wheel on the steering wheel

keypad.

Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to

go to the next/previous strong station,

press briefly to tune to a preset station.

Menu navigation

RADIO menu selections can be made from

the center console or the steering wheel key-

pad, see page 231 for more information.

Selecting a station (in wavebands

AM/FM1/FM2)

Automatic tuning

1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the

desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

2. Press / keys on the center con-

sole control panel or steering wheel key-

pad to search for the next available sta-

tion.

List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2

only)

The radio automatically compiles a list of the

strongest FM stations whose signals are cur-

rently being received. This enables you to find

stations when driving in areas where radio

stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar.

To access this list:

1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or

FM2).

2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction.

This displays the list of stations in the

area. The currently tuned station will be

indicated in the list by magnified text.

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to

select a station on the list.

4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad.

NOTE

•This list will only display the frequen-

cies of the stations currently being

received, not a complete list of all

radio frequencies on the currently

selected waveband.

•If the signal from the currently tuned

station is weak, this may prevent the

radio from updating the list of stations.

If this occurs, press while the list

of stations is displayed to switch to

manual tuning mode and select a sta-

tion. If the list of stations is no longer

displayed, turn TUNE in either direc-

tion to display the list again and press

The list will disappear from the display after

several seconds.

If the station list is no longer displayed, turn

TUNE in either direction and press on

06 Infotainment

Radio

241

the keypad on the center console to switch to

manual tuning (or to switch back from manual

tuning to the "list of stations" function).

Manual tuning

By default, the list of stations of the strongest

stations in the area will be displayed when

you turn TUNE (see the preceding section,

"List of stations"). While the list of stations is

displayed, press on the center console

keypad to switch to manual tuning, which

enables you to select a frequency from the

complete list of all radio frequencies availa-

ble on the currently selected waveband. In

other words, in manual tuning mode, turning

TUNE one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to

93.5, etc.).

To manually tune a station:

1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the

desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad to confirm.

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select

a frequency.

NOTE

The radio is initially set to automatically

search for stations in the area in which you

are driving (see the preceding section,

"List of stations").

However, if you have switched to manual

tuning (by pressing on the keypad

on the center console while the list of sta-

tions is displayed), the radio will remain in

manual tuning mode the next time it is

switched on. To switch back to "list of sta-

tions" mode, turn TUNE one step (to dis-

play the full list of stations) and press

Please note that if you press when

the list of stations is not displayed, this will

activate the INFO function.

Storing preset stations

Ten preset stations can be stored for each

waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).

Stored preset stations are selected using the

buttons on the keypad on the center console.

Manually storing preset stations

1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a sta-

tion" on page 240).

2. Press and hold one of the number key

buttons.

> The sound will be muted for several

seconds and when it returns, the sta-

tion has been stored on the number

key button used.

A list of preset stations can be displayed. This

function can be activated/deactivated in

AM/FM mode in FM menu Show presets

or in AM menu Show presets

Scan

The function automatically searches the cur-

rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta-

tion is found, it is played for several seconds

before scanning is resumed. While the station

is playing it can be stored as a preset in the

usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta-

tions").

–To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to

FM menu Scan or in AM menu

Scan.

Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.

NOTE

Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func-

tion.

06 Infotainment

Radio

242

Radio text

Some stations transmit information on pro-

gram content, artists, etc. This information

can be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show

radio text.

HD Radio™reception (U.S. models

only)

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio

broadcast

NOTE

HD radio volume may fade in and out at

times due to coverage limitations.

HD radio is a brand name registered by the

Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the

developer of a broadcasting technology

called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which

refers to the method of transmitting a digital

radio broadcast signal centered on the same

frequency as the AM or FM station's present

frequency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"

since it is both analogue and digital. During

hybrid operation, receivers still continue to

receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD

radio receivers incorporate both modes of

reception, where the receiver will automati-

cally switch to the analogue signal if the digi-

tal signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the

receiver. When you have tuned to an HD

Radio station, the symbol will appear in

the infotainment system display. The symbol

is "grayed-out" when HD Radio is in standby

mode and white when the radio is actively

receiving an HD broadcast.

More information about HD radio and IBOC

can be found on Ibiquity's website,

www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

•Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality

and AM as analogue FM).

•Some FM frequencies offer a greater

number of listening choices through “mul-

ticasting” (consisting of a frequency's

main channel and any sub-channels that

may also be available on that particular

frequency. See also the section "Sub-

channels" below).

•When receiving a digital signal there is no

multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/

crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional

radio and broadcasts of this type are availa-

ble in many areas of the United States. How-

ever, there are a few key differences:

•Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-

nal, stations send out a bundled signal –

both analogue and digital.

•An HD radio receiver can receive both

digital and analogue broadcasts.

Depending on the terrain and location of

the vehicle (which will influence the signal

1HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of

iBiquity Digital Corp.

06 Infotainment

Radio

243

strength), the receiver will determine

which signal to receive.

Limitations

•Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only chan-

nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both

digital and analogue). If a frequency has

sub-channels, they are broadcast in digi-

tal mode only. The main FM channel will

be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC

(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate

there are sub-channels available) The

sub-FM channels will be displayed as

93.9 – 2 WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

•Reception coverage area: Due to cur-

rent IBOC transmitter power limitations,

the reception coverage area in digital

mode is somewhat more limited than the

station's analogue coverage area. Please

be aware that as with any radio broadcast

technology, terrain, time of day, foliage

level and building location can have posi-

tive or negative effects on radio recep-

tion.

•Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending

will occur as the signal strength reaches a

preset threshold in the receiver. This will

be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with

weak reception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference in

sound quality when a change from ana-

logue to digital or digital to analogue

occurs, such as:

•Volume increase or decrease

•Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid-

range/Treble cut or boost

•Time alignment (Digital program mate-

rial in extreme cases can be as much

as 8 seconds behind the analogue).

This will noticeable as a "stuttering"

effect.

The above items are dependant on the

broadcaster's equipment settings and

do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's

radio receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is off. If acti-

vated when driving through areas with weak

HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience

that the radio repeatedly switches between

analogue/digital and digital/analogue recep-

tion. If this happens, it may be desirable to

switch HD off. To do so:

1. Be sure the infotainment system is

switched on and in one of the AM or FM

modes.

2. Press OK/MENU in the center console

control panel.

3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD

Radio.

4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will

disappear from the box on the display

screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to

receive digital broadcasts but it will continue

to function as a conventional (analogue)

AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is

switched off, it will not be possible to tune to

sub-channels (see the following section for a

more detailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an

X will appear in the box on the display

screen). Please note that this will only switch

HD on or off for the selected waveband (AM,

FM1, etc.).

06 Infotainment

Radio

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-chan-

nels

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM

wavebands only) will also have sub-channels

offering additional types of programming or

music.

In such cases, the “-” symbol will be dis-

played to the left of the frequency number

and a number will be displayed to the right of

the frequency number indicating that the cur-

rently tuned frequency has at least one sub-

channel.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press

and hold the right arrow key on the center

console or on the steering wheel keypad for

approximately 1 second. To go back to the

main channel, press and hold the left arrow

key on the center console or on the steering

wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To

go to subchannel 2 (if available), press and

hold the right arrow key on the center console

or on the steering wheel keypad for approxi-

mately 1 second.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's

main channel, pressing and holding the left

arrow key for approximately 1 second will

tune to the next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

•When the radio has gone into HD

mode, it may take several seconds

before the ">" symbol (if the current

frequency has any sub-channels) is

displayed to the left of the frequency.

Pressing and holding the arrow keys

for approximately 1 second before the

main-/sub-channel icon is displayed

will cause the radio to tune to the next

available radio station, not to the cur-

rent station's sub-channels.

•When you are no longer in broadcast-

ing range of the currently tuned sub-

channel, No reception will be dis-

played. The radio will then be muted

and it will be necessary to tune to or

search for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,

see page 241 for information on storing sta-

tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it

may take up to 6 seconds before the channel

becomes audible. If you press this button

while you are out of digital range of the trans-

mitter, No reception will be displayed.

SiriusXM™ satellite radio*

Listening to satellite radio

The SiriusXM™ satellite system consists of a

number of high elevation satellites in geosyn-

chronous orbit.

NOTE

•The digital signals from the satellites

are line-of-sight, which means that

physical obstructions such as bridges,

tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere

with signal reception.

•Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-

lic objects transported on roof racks or

in a ski box, or other antennas that

may impede signals from the Sir-

iusXM™ satellites.

06 Infotainment

Radio

245

Selecting SiriusXM™ radio mode

1. With the infotainment system switched

on, press RADIO.

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the

steering wheel keypad to scroll to the

desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and

press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad.

Activating SiriusXM™ radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no

audio, which means that the channel is

unsubscribed and the text Subscription

update needed is displayed (see also

"Selecting a channel").

2. Call SiriusXM™ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474).

3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel,

the SiriusXM™ ID will be displayed. The

SiriusXM™ ID can also be accessed from

the menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE

to scroll to the Advanced settings

menu, press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS

ID and press OK/MENU to display the

number).

4. Updating subscription will be displayed

while the subscription is being updated,

after which the display will return to the

normal view.

SiriusXM™ ID

The SiriusXM™ ID (sometimes referred to as

the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is

required when contacting the SiriusXM™ Call

Center. It is used to activate your account

and when making any account transactions.

Selecting a channel category

1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels.

2. Press EXIT.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

categories and press OK/MENU to make

a selection.

> The channels in the selected category

are displayed.

NOTE

•The category All is default, which ena-

bles you to scroll through the entire list

of available satellite channels.

•The channel categories are automati-

cally updated several times a year.

This takes approximately two minutes

and will interrupt normal broadcasting.

A message will be displayed while

updating is in progress. Information on

channel or feature updates is available

at www.siriusxm.com.

Selecting a channel

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

•Using the left and right arrow keys to go

to the next channel. Skipped channels

(see page 247) will be excluded.

•By turning the TUNE control and select-

ing a channel from the list

•Through direct channel entry.

NOTE

•The numbers of skipped or locked

channels will not be displayed.

•If a channel is locked, the access code

must be entered before the channel

can be selected. See "Unlocking a

channel" on page 248.

Direct channel entry

The SiriusXM™ satellite channels are in

numerical order throughout all of the catego-

ries. To access a channel directly:

1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.

2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the

channel's number.

3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to

this channel, even if it belongs to a cate-

gory other than the currently selected

one.

06 Infotainment

Radio

246

Scanning

Scan automatically searches through the list

of satellite channels. The search will only be

carried out in the selected category, see

page 241 for more detailed information on the

scan function.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;

10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see

page 241 for detailed information on storing

channels.

•A long press on one of the number keys

stores the currently tuned channel on that

key.

•A short press on a number key while the

radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune

to the preset satellite channel stored on

that button, regardless of the currently

selected channel category.

Searching for and storing songs

The Song Seek function provides notification

when SiriusXM™ is broadcasting the songs

selected in song memory. Song memory

enables you to store the name of the song for

future advance notification when that song is

being played.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of

the songs stored in the song memory while

the Song seek feature is activated, the lis-

tener will be alerted by a text message and an

audible signal.

Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT

to cancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek func-

tion:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory

and press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and

press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate

the function.

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio will

remain tuned to the channel on which the

song was played.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's

memory.

To add the currently playing song to the list:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/

MENU.

3. Scroll to Add current song to song

memory and press OK/MENU.

If a new song is selected when the memory is

full, you will be prompted to delete a song

from the list. To do so:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of

songs. Select a song and press OK/

MENU to delete it from the list.

Radio text

This text provides information about the song

that is currently playing. To turn this feature

on or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to

Show radio text and press OK/MENU to

toggle between on or off.

Advanced SiriusXM™ settings

This menu function enables you to make set-

tings on certain SiriusXM™ satellite radio

functions. To access this menu:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu

and press OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment

Radio

247

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicle

is at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the

satellite menus:

•Channel skip settings can be made

•Channel lock settings can be made

•The channel access code can be dis-

played or changed (see also "Locking a

channel" on page 247)

•Your SiriusXM™ ID can be displayed

•Reset SiriusXM™ settings

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel

from the list of available channels.

Skipping a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip

options menu.

4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip

list.

5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all

channels in the category or turn TUNE

to scroll to a channel and press OK/

MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple

channels can be selected.

Unskip all channels

This removes all channels from the skip list

and makes them available for selection.

Temporary unskip all channels

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-

nels and make them available for selection.

The channels remain on the skip list and will

again be skipped the next time the ignition is

switched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted

(locked). A locked channel will not provide

audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked.

Locking a channel

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.

3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll

to the Lock options menu and press

OK/MENU.

4. Use the keypad in the central control

panel to enter the channel access code2

and press OK/MENU.

5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel

lock list.

6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories

or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and

press OK/MENU to select it.

7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all

channels in the category or turn TUNE

to scroll to a channel and press OK/

MENU to select it. Multiple channels can

be selected.

The selected channel is now locked and a

checked box will be displayed to indicate

this. It will be necessary to enter the channel

access code2 in order to listen to a locked

channel.

2The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

06 Infotainment

Radio

248

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code2 is required to

unlock a channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels from

the locked list and makes them available for

selection.

Temporarily unlock all channels

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-

nels and make them available for selection.

The channels remain on the locked list and

will again be locked the next time the ignition

is switched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change the

channel access code. The default code is

0000.

To change the code:

1. Select Change code in the Lock

options menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Enter the new code and press OK/

MENU.

3. Confirm the new code and press OK/

MENU.

If an incorrect code is entered, the text

Incorrect code is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code:

1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced

settings menu and press OK/MENU.

2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for

several seconds.

3. The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with

assistance.

SiriusXM™ ID

This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM™

activation ID.

2The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

06 Infotainment

Media player

}}

249

CD/DVD1 functions

Center console control panel

Disc slot

MEDIA button, the most recently used

active source will start when MEDIA is

pressed. Pressing this key from Media

mode's main view will display a shortcut

menu.

Eject

Keypad

TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu

selections/folders/tracks (or turn the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad).

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus for the currently

selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the

thumb wheel on the steering wheel key-

pad.

Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward

and change track or chapter2.

The media player supports and can play the

following main types of discs and files:

•Purchased CDs (CD Audio)

•Home-burned CDs with audio and /or

video files

•Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or

video files

•Purchased DVDs

For a list of compatible formats, see

page 252.

Media menu selections can be made from

the center console or the steering wheel key-

pad, see page 231.

For general information regarding menu navi-

gation, see page 233 and menu overview see

page 237.

Playing a disc

Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/

MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player,

it will begin playing automatically. Otherwise,

Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc

into the slot with the text side upward and it

will begin playing automatically.

If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its

folder structure will be read by the system. It

may take several seconds until the disc

begins playing, depending on its quality and

the amount of information it contains.

Disc eject

For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc

must be removed within 12 seconds or it will

be automatically drawn back into the slot.

Pause

When the infotainment system volume is

turned off completely or the sound is muted,

the player will pause. It will resume playing

when the volume is turned up again or if the

sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via

the menu system, select Play/Pause.

1The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion.

2DVDs only

06 Infotainment

Media player

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Navigating a disc and playing tracks

CD audio discs

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and

to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to

confirm a choice and begin listening. Press

EXIT to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return

to the playlist's root level.

The / buttons on the center console

or steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks.

Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files

Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and

to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to

confirm a choice and begin listening. Use

EXIT to stop or to go back in the disc's folder

structure. Press and hold EXIT to return to

the playlist's root level.

The / buttons on the center console

or steering wheel keypad* can also be used

to change audio/video files.

The following symbols are used in the dis-

play:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the

same type) in the current folder. When all of

the files in the folder have been played, the

player will automatically go to the next folder

and play the files in it (unless Repeat folder

is activated).

The system automatically detects and

changes settings if a disc containing only

audio or only video files is inserted in the

player and will play these files. However, the

system will not change settings if a disc con-

taining both audio and video files is inserted

and the player will continue to play the cur-

rent type of file.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available

while driving will be displayed. Sound

from the film will still be audible and video

images will be shown again when the vehi-

cle stops.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files or home-

burned audio files may not be read by the

player.

DVD videos

For information, see page 249.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the / buttons to fast

forward/reverse. This is done at one speed

for audio files but several speeds can be

chosen for video files. Press the / but-

tons several times to increase the speed.

Release the button to return to normal view-

ing speed.

Scan3

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each track/audio file. To start scanning:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Scan.

> The first ten seconds of each track/

audio file will be played.

3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur-

rent track/audio file will continue playing.

3Not video DVDs

06 Infotainment

Media player

251

Random3

This function plays the tracks in random order

(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can

be scrolled through in the normal way. To lis-

ten to tracks in random order:

1. Press OK/MENU,

2. Scroll to Random

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the random play function.

Press the / buttons on the center

console or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks/audio files.

Repeat folder4

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has

been played, the first file will begin again. To

activate:

1. Press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate

the function.

Playing video DVDs

Play

When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may

appear on the display, giving you access to

extra functions and settings such as choice of

subtitle and language, scene selection, etc.

NOTE

Video images will only be visible when the

vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is

traveling faster than approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h), No visual media available

while driving will be displayed. Sound

from the film will still be audible and video

images will be shown again when the vehi-

cle stops.

Navigating in a DVD's menus

Buttons in the center console control panel,

shown in the illustration, are used to navigate

in a DVD's menus.

Changing chapters or title

Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and

navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is

currently playing). Press OK/MENU to

choose a chapter and return to the normal

view in the display (if a film was playing, it will

resume). Press EXIT to access the list of

titles.

In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a

selection and press OK/MENU to confirm.

This also returns you to the list of chapters.

3Not video DVDs

4Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

06 Infotainment

Media player

252

Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal

view (without having made a selection).

It is also possible to change chapters by

pressing / on the center console

control panel or on the steering wheel key-

pad.

Advanced settings

Angle

If the DVD supports this function, it is possi-

ble to select a camera angle for a certain

scene.

This can be done in DVD mode under DVD

disc menu Advanced settings Angle.

DivX® Video On Demand

The media player can be registered to play

DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or

USB. The registration code can be found by

pressing the MY CAR button, and going to

Settings Information DivX® VOD

code. See page 201 for more information

about the menu system.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,

DivX Certified® and associated logos are

registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are

used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:

DivX® is a digital video format created by

DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified

device that plays DivX video. Visit

www.divx.com for more information and

software tools to convert your files into DivX

video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX

Certified® device must be registered in order

to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)

content. To generate the registration code,

locate the DivX VOD section in the device

setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with

this code to complete the registration

process and learn more about DivX VOD.

Covered by one or more of the following U.S.

Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;

7,519,274.

See also www.divx.com/vod for more infor-

mation.

Screen settings

Screen settings can be made (when the vehi-

cle is not moving) for:

•Brightness

•Contrast

1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image

settings and confirm by pressing OK/

MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and

press OK/MENU.

3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and

confirm the change by pressing OK/

MENU.

Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the

screen settings list.

To return to the factory settings, select

Reset .

Compatible formats

The media player can play a number of differ-

ent types of files and disc formats, and is

compatible with the formats listed in the fol-

lowing table.

06 Infotainment

Media player

253

NOTE

Dual format (double-sided discs) such as

DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor-

mal discs and may not play in your info-

tainment system.

If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3

tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be

ignored.

Audio for-

mats

CD-Audio, mp3, wma,

aac, m4a

Video for-

mats

CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,

avi, asf

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

254

Connecting external devices

Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com-

partment between the front seats

An auxiliary device, such as an iPod® or MP3

player can be connected to the infotainment

system via one of the sockets in the center

console storage compartment. A device con-

nected to the USB socket can be operated

using the vehicle's infotainment system con-

trols.

An iPod® or an MP3 player with rechargeable

batteries will also be charged if the device is

connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's

ignition is on or if the engine is running).

To connect a device:

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select

the desired source (iPod, USB or AUX).

Press OK/MENU.

> For example, if a USB device has been

selected, the text Connect USB will

be displayed.

2. Connect the device to one of the sockets

in the center console storage compart-

ment (see the illustration).

The text Reading USB will be displayed

while the system reads the device's folders.

This may take a short time, depending on the

folder structure and the number of files.

When this information has been loaded, track

information will be displayed and a track can

be selected.

NOTE

•The system supports a number of

iPod® models produced in 2005 or

later.

•In order to help avoid damage to the

USB socket, it will be switched off if

there is a short circuit or if the con-

nected device uses too much current

(which can happen if the device does

not comply with the USB standard).

The USB socket will reactivate the

next time the ignition is switched on if

the problem no longer exists. If the

problem persists, contact a trained

and authorized Volvo service techni-

cian.

Media menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad,

see page 231 for more information.

Navigating and playing tracks1

Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist

and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU

to either select a sub-folder or confirm a

choice and begin playback. Press EXIT to

cancel and exit the playlist or to go back in

the folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to

go to the highest level in the playlist.

1USB and iPod® only

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

255

The / buttons on the center console

or steering wheel keypad can also be used to

change tracks/files.

The following symbols are used in the dis-

play:

•- audio files

•- video files

•- folders

When a file has been played, the player will

continue to play the rest of the files (of the

same type) in the current folder. When all of

the files in the folder have been played, the

player will automatically go to the next folder1

(unless Repeat folder is activated) and play

the files in it.

The system automatically detects and

changes settings if a device containing only

audio or only video files is connected to the

USB socket and will play these files. How-

ever, the system will not change settings if

the device contains both audio and video files

and will continue to play the current type of

file.

Fast forward/reverse1

For information, see page 250.

Scan1

For information, see page 250.

Random1

For information, see page 251.

Search1

The keypad in the center console can be

used to search for a file in the currently

selected folder.

Start the search by either turning TUNE (to

access the folders) or by pressing one of the

character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos-

sible search results will be displayed as char-

acters are entered.

Play the file by pressing OK/MENU.

Repeat2

This function makes it possible to play files in

a folder repeatedly. When the last file has

been played, the first file will begin again. For

information, see page 251.

Pause

When the infotainment system volume is

turned off completely or the sound is muted,

the player will pause. It will resume playing

when the volume is turned up again or if the

sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via

the menu system, select Play/Pause.

External sound sources

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is

advisable to only store music files on the

drive. It will take considerably longer for the

system to index the files on the drive if it con-

tains anything other than compatible music

files.

NOTE

•The system supports removable media

that uses the USB 2.0 standard and

the FAT32 file system. It can index up

to 1,000 folders and a maximum of

254 sub-folders/files for each folder.

However, the highest folder level can

support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

•When using a longer type of USB

device, connecting it with a USB

adapter cable will help reduce

mechanical wear on the USB socket

and on the device.

1USB and iPod® only

2USB only

06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

256

USB hub

A USB hub can be connected to the USB

socket, making it possible to connect several

USB devices at the same time. To select one

of the devices, go to the menu USB menu

Select USB device

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have a file indexing sys-

tem that is not supported by the vehicle's

infotainment system. In order to use an MP3

player, the system must be set to USB

Removable device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod®

An iPod® receives current and its battery is

charged through the USB cable.

The system will only play audio files from an

iPod®.

NOTE

When an iPod® is used as a sound source,

the vehicle's infotainment system has a

menu structure similar to the one in the

iPod®. See the iPod's manual for detailed

information.

Compatible file formats via the USB

socket

The following audio and video files are sup-

ported by the system when playing a device

connected to the USB socket.

Audio formats mp3, wma, aac, m4a

Video formats divx, avi, asf

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® media

257

Introduction

The vehicle's media player is equipped with

Bluetooth® and can play streaming audio files

from a Bluetooth® device such as a cell

phone or mp3 player. Navigation and control

of the device can be done through the vehi-

cle's center console control panel or the

steering wheel keypad. On certain external

devices, it is also possible to change tracks

from the device.

NOTE

Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup-

port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile

(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution

Profile (A2DP). The phone must use

AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older

versions of these standards are used, cer-

tain features (e.g., scan or random) may

not function.

Not all cell phones are fully compatible

with the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list

of compatible phones is available at you

Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us.

Menu navigation

Choices can be made in the Bluetooth

menus from the center console control panel

or the steering wheel keypad. For additional

information about navigating the various

menus, see page 231.

The vehicle's media player can only play

audio files through the Bluetooth® function.

Overview

Center console control panel

VOL: Volume control

MEDIA button, the most recently used

active source will start when MEDIA is

pressed. Pressing this key from Media

mode's main view will display a shortcut

menu.

TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu

alternatives and folders shown in the dis-

play.

OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec-

tion or access the menus.

EXIT: Press to go back in the menu

structure or cancel a function.

Left/right arrow keys: Short press:

change tracks. Long press: fast forward/

reverse within a track. The arrow keys on

the steering wheel keypad can be used in

the same way.

Pairing and connecting an external

device

Before an external device can be connected,

it must be paired to the infotainment system.

The procedure for connecting an external

device varies, depending whether or not the

device has previously been paired to the info-

tainment system. A maximum of 10 external

devices can be paired and each device only

needs to be paired once. To pair a device,

see page 260.

Automatic connection

When the Bluetooth® function is active and

the most recently used device is within range,

it is automatically connected. When the info-

tainment system searches for the most

recently used device, its name is shown in the

display. To connect another paired device,

press EXIT. See the following section for

information about switching to another

device.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® media

258

Switching to another device

It is possible to switch among paired

Bluetooth® devices that are in the vehicle. To

do so:

1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and

press the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

2. Be sure the Bluetooth® device is discov-

erable (refer to its user manual if neces-

sary).

3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to

Change device and confirm by pressing

the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

> After several seconds, the names of

any paired external devices will be dis-

played.

5. Scroll to the device to be connected and

press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

> The device will be connected.

Audio files can now be selected using the

/ buttons in the center console or on

the steering wheel keypad.

Disconnecting an external device

The external device is automatically discon-

nected from the infotainment system if it is

moved out of range.

Removing a paired device

1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and

press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

3. Scroll to the device to be removed by

turning the thumb wheel or TUNE and

confirm by pressing the thumb wheel or

OK/MENU.

> A question asking if you would like to

remove the device will be displayed.

4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to

confirm or EXIT to cancel.

Random1

This function plays the audio files on the

external device in random order (shuffle). This

function can be activated/deactivated under:

Bluetooth menu Random

Press the / buttons on the center

console or steering wheel keypad to change

tracks.

Scanning audio files on an external

device1

This function plays the first ten seconds of

each audio file. This function can be acti-

vated/deactivated under: Bluetooth menu

Scan. Scanning can be canceled by pressing

EXIT.

Bluetooth® version information

This feature offers information about the

Bluetooth® version installed in the vehicle's

infotainment system. This information can be

found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth

software version in car.

1Function is not supported on all cell phones.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

259

Introduction

This feature makes it possible to set up a

wireless connection between a Bluetooth®-

enabled cell phone or other device and the

vehicle’s infotainment system. This enables

the infotainment system to function as a

hands-free connection and allows you to

remote-control a number of the phone’s func-

tions. The microphone used by this system is

located near the driver's side sun visor (2).

The buttons and other controls on the cell

phone can always be used regardless of

whether or not the phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible

with the hands-free system. A list of com-

patible phones is available at your Volvo

retailer or at www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or any

other device in your vehicle in a way that

distracts you from the task of driving

safely. Distraction can lead to a serious

accident.

Compliance

FCC/IC common sentence

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC

Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules and Industry

Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA134

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA135

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

IC RSS-Gen

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-

led environment and meets the FCC radio fre-

quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-

ment C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC

radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This

equipment has very low levels of RF energy

that it deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it

is desirable that it should be installed and

operated keeping the radiator at least 8 in.

(20 cm) or more away from person’s body

(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and

ankles).

Canada: IC 700BIAM2103

Canada: IC 700BIAM2104

Menu navigation

TEL menu selections can be made from the

center console or the steering wheel keypad.

For additional information about navigating

the various menus, see page 231.

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Center console control panel and display

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

260

Bluetooth® functions in the center

console control panel

Control panel in the center console.

Keypad containing letters and numbers

for dialing numbers, adding phone book

entries, etc.

TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti-

vate the Bluetooth® function. If TEL is

already active, pressing this button again

will display a shortcut menu with com-

monly used functions.

TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view,

turn clockwise to display the phone book

or counterclockwise for the phone list. It

can also be used for navigating in dis-

played menus. The thumb wheel in the

steering wheel keypad can be used in the

same way.

OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming

call, confirm your selection or access the

phone menus. Incoming calls can also be

answered by pressing the thumb wheel

on the steering wheel keypad.

EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase

characters that have been entered, end

an ongoing function and goes back in the

menus. This button on the steering wheel

keypad can also be used in the same

way.

Getting started

Use the controls on the steering wheel key-

pad and in the center console to access, nav-

igate and make selections in the hands-free

system’s menus.

Activation

A short press on the TEL button in the center

console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free

system. If the system is already activated

when the button is pressed, a shortcut menu

will be displayed. The symbol at the

upper right of the display indicates that the

hands-free system is active.

Pairing (connecting) external

Bluetooth® devices

A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devi-

ces can be paired with the hands-free sys-

tem. Pairing only needs to be done once for

each phone. After pairing, the cell phone no

longer needs to be in sight or discoverable.

Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an

iPod®) can be active at the same. However,

two phones cannot be used at the same time

to make calls.

There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to

the hands-free system for the first time:

Method 1: Search for the external device

using the infotainment menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func-

tion to make it discoverable (refer to the

phone’s user manual if necessary) or go

to www.volvocars.com

2. Press TEL.

> The infotainment system will search for

previously paired devices.

3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering

wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select

Add phone.1

1Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed.

Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

}}

261

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode,

press OK/MENU.

> The infotainment system will search for

cell phones or devices that are in

range, which takes approximately 30

seconds. Any phones detected will be

displayed using their Bluetooth®

names. The hands-free system’s

Bluetooth® name will appear in the cell

phone’s display as My Volvo Car.

5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select

one of the cell phones shown in the cen-

ter console display and press the thumb

wheel or OK/MENU.

6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the

digits (PIN code) shown in the center con-

sole display and press the button on the

cell phone used to confirm a choice.

The external device is now paired and can be

controlled from the infotainment system.

If the connection failed: Press EXIT and con-

nect with method 2 below.

Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the

external device’s Bluetooth® function.

1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device

is already connected, disconnect it.

>The Bluetooth® function will search for

previously paired devices.

2. Make the vehicle discoverable by press-

ing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and

selecting Phone settings

Discoverable.

3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or

external device's Bluetooth® function.

Refer to its user manual if necessary.

4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or

external device’s screen and follow the

directions provided.

5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the

external device and press its button to

pair the device. When prompted, enter

the same PIN code in the vehicle using

the center console keypad.

6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external

device.

When the external device has been paired, its

Bluetooth® name appear in the center con-

sole display. This device can now be con-

trolled from the infotainment system.

Connect automatically

When the hands-free system is active and the

most recently connected cell phone is within

range, it will be connected automatically. If

this phone is not within range, the hands-free

system will attempt to connect one of the

other paired cell phones. When the infotain-

ment system searches for the most recently

connected phone, its name appears in the

display.

Connect manually

To connect a phone other than the one that

was most recently connected or to switch

between cell phones that are already paired

with the hands-free system, go to Phone

menu Change phone.

Changing phones or devices

More than one device can be used in the

vehicle as long as this device has been

paired. To do so, see page 260.

Changing devices:

1. Check that the external device is discov-

erable.

2. Press TEL and select Change phone.

> The infotainment system will search for

previously paired devices. Those that

are detected will be displayed on the

screen.

3. Select the desired device by turning the

thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by

pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

> The device will be connected.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

262

Making a call

1. Ensure that is shown at the top of

the center console display and that the

hands-free function is in telephone mode.

2. Dial the desired phone number using the

center console keypad or use the speed

dial function (see page 266). In normal

view (see page see page 231 for informa-

tion about the various display views), it is

also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to

access the phone book and then counter-

clockwise for the call list. See page 267

for more information about the phone

book.

3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

End or reject a call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnected

from the infotainment system if it is moved

out of range.

The cell phone can be manually disconnected

from the hands-free system by pressing and

holding TEL or in phone mode, going to

Phone menu Disconnect phone. See also

page 263 for more information about con-

nections.

The hands-free system is also deactivated

when the ignition is switched off (or if the

driver’s door is opened).

When the cell phone is disconnected from the

hands-free system, a call in progress can be

continued using the cell phone’s own speaker

and microphone.

Even if the cell phone has been disconnected

manually, some phones may reconnect auto-

matically, for example when a new call is initi-

ated.

Removing a paired device

A paired phone or device can be removed

from the list. To do so:

1. Press TEL.

2. Select Phone menu Remove

Bluetooth device.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

–Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on

the steering wheel keypad) to answer a

call, even if the infotainment system is

currently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or

MEDIA).

Press EXIT to reject a call.

Auto answer

This function means that incoming calls will

be answered automatically. Activate or deac-

tivate the function in the menu system under

Phone menu Call options Auto

answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU

or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel

keypad to access the following functions:

•Mute: mute the infotainment system’s

microphone.

•Mobile phone: transfer the call from

hands-free to the cell phone. On certain

cell phones, the connection will be bro-

ken, which is normal. The hands-free

function will ask if you would like to

reconnect.

•Dial number: dial a third party during an

ongoing call using the keypad (the current

call will be put on hold).

Call lists

Call lists are copied to the hands-free func-

tion each time a cell phone is connected and

the lists are updated while the phone is con-

nected. In normal view, turn TUNE counter-

clockwise to see the All calls list.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

263

In phone mode, the various call lists can be

displayed in Phone menu Call lists:

•All calls

•Missed calls

•Answered calls

•Dialled calls (certain cell phones show

this list in reverse order)

•Call duration

If no number has been stored, this menu can

be accessed by pressing and holding 1.

Voice mail

In normal view, a speed dial number for voice

mail can be programmed and accessed by

pressing and holding 1.

The number for voice mail can be changed in

phone mode in Phone menu Call options

Voicemail number Change number.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be only be adjusted during a

call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel

keypad or the infotainment system’s VOL

control.

Infotainment system volume

If no phone call is in progress, volume for the

infotainment system can be adjusted in the

normal way with the infotainment system's

VOL control or from the steering wheel key-

pad.

Infotainment system sound can be automati-

cally muted when a phone call is received in

Phone menu Phone settings Sounds

and volume Mute radio/media.

Ringing volume

In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

volume and adjust the volume by turning

VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringing

tones can be selected in Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc.

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone may

not be switched off when one of the

hands-free system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell

phone’s ring tone2, go to Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.

Phone book

The hands-free system uses two phone

books (one with the cell phone's list of con-

tacts and one with contacts saved directly in

the infotainment system), which are com-

bined to form one phone book.

•The infotainment system downloads the

phone book from a connected cell phone.

This phone book will only be displayed

when this cell phone is connected to the

hands-free system.

•The infotainment system also has an inte-

grated phone book made up of contacts

that have been saved in the system,

regardless of which cell phone is currently

2Not supported by all cell phones.

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

264

connected when the contact is saved.

These contacts will be displayed regard-

less of the cell phone that is connected. If

a contact has been saved in the infotain-

ment system, the symbol will be

displayed next to it.

NOTE

Changes made from the infotainment sys-

tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone

book will result in a new contact being

added to the infotainment system's phone

book. However, this contact will not be

saved in the cell phone's phone book. The

infotainment system's display will show

duplicate contacts with different icons.

Please also note that if a speed dial num-

ber is saved or if a contact's information is

edited, this will result in a new contact in

the infotainment system's phone book.

The symbol must be displayed before

the phone book can be used and the hands-

free function must be in phone mode.

The infotainment system saves a copy of

each paired cell phone's phone book. This

phone book can be copied each time the

phone is connected.

–Activate/deactivate this function in phone

mode in Phone menu Phone settings

Download phone book.

If the phone book contains information about

someone who is trying to call you, this infor-

mation will be shown in the display.

Contact shortcuts

A quick way of searching the phone book for

contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE

clockwise to access the phone book and then

counter-clockwise to select a contact from

the list. Press OK/MENU to call.

Each name in the phone book has a default

phone number. If the symbol is displayed

to the right of it, this indicates that there are

additional phone numbers for this contact. To

use a phone number other than the default

one, press the button on the center

console control panel. Turn TUNE to select a

different phone number and press OK/MENU

to call.

It is also possible to search for a contact by

using the center console keypad to enter the

first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also

the following table "Buttons in the center con-

sole" for each button's function).

The list of contacts can also be accessed

from normal view by pressing and holding the

button on the center console keypad with the

first letter of the contact's name. For exam-

ple, pressing and holding button 6 would pro-

vide direct access to the section of the list

with contacts whose names begin with M.

Buttons in the center console

Button Function

Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1

A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2

D E F È É 3

G H I Ì 4

J K L 5

M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6

P Q R S ß 7

T U V Ü Ù 8

W X Y Z 9

Shift between upper and lower

case

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

}}

265

Button Function

+ 0 p w

# *

Searching for contacts

Searching for contacts using the text wheel

List of characters

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Phone book (list of contacts)

To search for or edit a contact in phone

mode, go to Phone menu Phone book

Search.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The

results of the search will be displayed in

the phone book (3).

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special char-

acters, or to go to the phone book, turn

TUNE to one of the selections (see the

explanation in the following table) in the

list for switching character entry mode (2)

and press OK/MENU.

Character entry modes

123/ABC Toggle between letters and

numbers by pressing OK/

MENU.

More Switch to special characters

by pressing OK/MENU.

This leads to the phone book

(3). Turn TUNE to select a con-

tact and press OK/MENU to

display the contact's informa-

tion.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.

Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char-

acters that have been entered.

If a number button on the center console is

pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a

list of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly

press the button once to enter its first letter,

twice to enter the second letter, etc. Continue

to press the button to display other charac-

ters. Continue with the next character, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the but-

ton.

Adding a new contact

Enter the name of a new contact

Switch between character entry modes

(see the following table)

Character entry field

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

266

New contacts can be added in phone mode

in Phone menu Phone book New

contact.

1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/

MENU to go to the character entry mode

(see the illustration).

2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name

entered will be displayed in the character

entry field (2).

4. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special char-

acters, or to toggle between upper and

lower case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one

of the selections (see the explanation in

the following table) in the list (1) and press

OK/MENU.

When you have finished entering the name,

select OK in the list in the display (1) and

press OK/MENU. Continue by entering the

phone number in the same way.

When you have entered the phone number,

press OK/MENU and select a tag for the

number (Mobile phone, Home, Work or

General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.

When all of the contact's information has

been entered, select Save contact in the

menu to save.

123/AB

Toggle between letters and

numbers by pressing OK/

MENU.

More Switch to special characters

by pressing OK/MENU.

OK Save and return to Add con-

tact by pressing OK/MENU.

Toggle between upper and

lower case letters by pressing

OK/MENU.

Press OK/MENU and the cur-

sor will move to the character

entry field (2) at the top of the

display. The cursor can now be

moved by turning TUNE to a

position where new characters

can be entered or deleted by

pressing EXIT. In order to add

characters, return to text entry

mode by pressing OK/MENU.

Speed dial

Speed dial numbers can be added in phone

mode in Phone menu Phone book

Speed dial.

To use speed dial to make a call in phone

mode, press a button on the center console

keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact

has not been saved on the speed dial number

used, you will be prompted to save a contact

on the number selected.

Accept vCards

vCards from other cell phones can be added

to the infotainment system's phone book. To

enable this feature, put the infotainment sys-

tem in discoverable mode for Bluetooth®. The

feature is activated in Phone menu Phone

book Receive vCard.

Memory status

In phone mode, the memory status of the

infotainment system's phone book and the

connected cell phone's phone book can be

seen in Phone menu Phone book

Memory status.

Clearing the phone book

In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment

system's phone book can be cleared in

06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

267

Phone menu Phone book Clear phone

book.

NOTE

Clearing the entries in the infotainment

system's phone book does not delete

entries in the cell phone's phone book.

Bluetooth® version information

For information about the Bluetooth® version

installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu

Phone settings Bluetooth software

version in car.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

The infotainment system's voice control fea-

ture1 enables the driver to voice-activate cer-

tain functions in a Bluetooth®-connected cell

phone or the navigation system.

NOTE

•The information in this section applies

to using voice commands to operate a

Bluetooth®-connected cell phone.

See also the section "Bluetooth®

hands-free connection" beginning on

page 259 for detailed information

about using a cell phone with the vehi-

cle's infotainment system.

•The navigation system has a separate

user's guide containing information

about voice commands for operating

that system.

Voice commands offer convenience and help

avoid distractions so that you can concen-

trate on driving and focus your attention on

road and traffic conditions.

WARNING

As the driver, you have full responsibility

for operating the vehicle safely and adher-

ing to all applicable traffic regulations.

The voice control feature provides access to

a number of functions in the Bluetooth®

hands-free and navigation systems while

allowing you to keep your hands on the steer-

ing wheel. Input is in dialogue form using

spoken commands from the user and verbal

prompts from the system. Voice control uses

the same microphone as the Bluetooth®

hands-free system (see the illustration on

page 259) and system prompts are provided

through the infotainment system's front

speakers.

Languages

List of languages.

Voice control is not available for all lan-

guages. The available languages are indi-

cated by the icon. The language can be

changed in the MY CAR menu system under

MY CAR Settings System options

Language.

1Available in vehicles equipped with the Volvo Navigation System* only

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269

Getting started

Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel.

Activating the system

Before any phone voice commands can be

used, a Bluetooth®-enabled cell phone must

be paired with the infotainment system. If a

phone command is given, the system will

inform you If there is no cell phone paired.

See page 260 for information on pairing a cell

phone.

Press the voice control button (1 in the illus-

tration) to activate the system and initiate a

command dialogue. The system will display

commonly used commands on the screen

when the button has been pressed.

While using the voice control system, keep

the following points in mind:

•When giving commands, speak at your

usual speed and in a normal tone of voice

after the tone

•The vehicle's doors, windows and moon-

roof should be closed when using the

voice control system

•Avoid background noises in the cabin

when using the system

NOTE

If you are uncertain of the commands that

you can use, saying "help" will prompt the

system to provide a number of commands

that can be used in a specific situation.

Voice control commands can be cancelled

by:

•Saying "cancel"

•Not speaking

•Pressing and holding the voice control

button

•Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but-

tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

Voice control support feature

•Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint

you with the system and the procedure

for giving commands.

This feature can be accessed by pressing the

MY CAR button in the center console and

turning TUNE.

Tutorial

The tutorial feature can be started in two

ways:

NOTE

The tutorial feature can only be started

when the vehicle is parked and the parking

brake is applied.

•By pressing the voice control button and

saying "Voice tutorial."

•By pressing MY CAR and going to

Settings Voice settings Voice

tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the

tutorial lesson.

The tutorial is divided into three lessons,

which take a total of approximately 5 minutes

to complete.

By default, the system will begin with the first

lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the

voice control button and say "next." Go back

to a previous lesson by saying "previous."

Press and hold the voice control button to

exit the tutorial.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Voice output volume

Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice

settings Voice output volume. Press OK/

MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the

volume. Press EXIT to save the change and

exit the menu.

Using voice commands

The driver initiates a voice command dialogue

by pressing the voice control button (see the

illustration on page 269).

When a dialogue has been initiated, com-

monly used commands will be shown in the

display. Grayed-out texts or texts in paren-

theses are not part of the spoken command.

Once you become familiar with the system,

you can speed up the command dialogue by

briefly pressing the voice control button to

skip prompts from the system.

Commands can be given in several ways.

For example, the command "Phone call con-

tact" can be spoken as:

•"Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone,"

wait for a system response, and then

continue by saying "Call contact."

•"Phone call contact"—give the entire

command at one time

The following is a list of features that can be

voice-controlled with a Bluetooth®-connected

cell phone.

Shortcuts

Shortcut commands for using the phone can

be found in the MY CAR menu system, under

Settings Voice settings Voice

command list Phone commands and

General commands. See page 201 for more

information on the menu system.

Dialing a number

The system understands the digits zero to

nine. These numbers can be spoken individu-

ally, in groups of several digits at a time, or

the entire number can be given at once.

Numbers above nine will not be recognized.

The following is an example of a voice com-

mand dialogue. The system's response may

vary depending on the situation.

The user initiates the dialogue by

saying:

Phone > dial number

Phone dial number

System response

Number please

User action

Begin saying the digits in the phone number.

If you say several digits and pause, the sys-

tem will repeat them and prompt you by say-

ing "Continue."

Continue saying the digits. When you have

finished, complete the command by saying

"Dial."

•You can also change the number by

using the commands "Correction" (which

deletes the last group of digits spoken) or

"Delete" (which will erase the entire

phone number).

Dialing from a call list

The dialogue below enables you make a call

from one of your cell phone's call lists.

The user initiates the dialogue by

saying:

Phone > dial from call list

Phone dial from call list

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

Calling a contact

The dialogue below enables you to call the

pre-defined contacts in your cell phone. See

the phone's user's guide if necessary.

06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

The user initiates the dialogue by

saying:

Phone > call contact

Phone call contact

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

When calling contacts, keep the following in

mind:

•If there are several contacts with similar

names, they will be presented in the dis-

play in numbered lines and the system

will prompt you to pick a line number

•If there are more lines in the list than can

be displayed at one time, saying "Down"

will enable you to scroll downward in the

list (and saying "up" will take you back up

through the list).

Dialing voice mail

The dialogue below enables you to call your

voice mail to check any messages that you

may have received. Your voice mail phone

number must be registered in the Bluetooth®

function, see page 263.

The user initiates the dialogue by

saying:

Phone > dial voice mail

Phone dial voice mail

Continue by responding to the system's

prompts.

272

Driving recommendations..................................................................... 274

Refueling............................................................................................... 278

Loading................................................................................................. 283

Cargo area ........................................................................................... 287

Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 290

Emergency towing................................................................................ 293

DURING YOUR TRIP

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

274

General information

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and

stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle

to immediate traffic conditions.

Observe the following rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving

with a light foot on the accelerator pedal

for the first few minutes of operation. A

cold engine uses more fuel and is subject

to increased wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi-

cle for driving short distances. This does

not allow the engine to reach normal

operating temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera-

tion and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's Drive (D) position

as often as possible and avoid using kick-

down.

•Using the transmission's Sport mode1

may increase fuel consumption some-

what. Use the transmission's Drive (D)

position as often as possible. See page

130 for additional information about Sport

mode.

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra

load) in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow

or ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,

increase air resistance and also fuel con-

sumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-

tion will be lower with the air conditioning

on and the windows closed than with the

air conditioning off and the windows

open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel

consumption modes can help you learn

how to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and oth-

ers are checked at the standard maintenance

intervals.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving

with the tailgate open could lead to poi-

sonous exhaust gases entering the pas-

senger compartment. If the tailgate must

be kept open for any reason, proceed as

follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side win-

dows and the blower control to its

highest setting.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has

a tendency to understeer, which means that

the steering wheel has to be turned more

than might seem appropriate for the curva-

ture of a bend. This ensures good stability

and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.

Remember that these properties can alter

with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in

the cargo area, the less the tendency to

understeer.

1Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

275

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pres-

sure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,

check that the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended pressure according to the vehicle

load. See the "Tire pressure" section. Loads

should be distributed so that capacity weight

or maximum permissible axle loads are not

exceeded.

Driving through water

•The vehicle can be driven through water

up to a depth of approximately 10 in.

(25 cm), at a maximum speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h).

•Take particular care when driving through

flowing water.

•Clean the electrical connections for trailer

wiring after driving in mud or water.

•When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

•Avoid driving through standing or

rushing water. Doing so can be dan-

gerous and it may also be difficult to

determine the actual depth of the

water.

•If water cannot be avoided, after driv-

ing through the water, press lightly on

the brake pedal to ensure that the

brakes are functioning normally. Water

or mud can make the brake linings

slippery, resulting in delayed braking

effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may

enter the differential and the transmis-

sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating

capacity and may shorten the service

life of these components.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in

water up to the door sills longer than

absolutely necessary. This could result

in electrical malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while

the vehicle is in water, do not attempt

to restart it. Have the vehicle towed

out of the water.

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine

and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as

follows to avoid overheating the engine.

•Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep hills.

•Do not turn the engine off immediately

when stopping after a hard drive.

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

276

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to

operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the

engine has been switched off.

•Remove any auxiliary lights from in front

of the grille when driving in hot weather

conditions.

•Do not exceed engine speeds of

4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly

terrain. The oil temperature could become

too high.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimize

battery drain:

•When the engine is not running, avoid

using ignition mode II. Many electrical

systems (the audio system, the optional

navigation system, power windows, etc)

will function in ignition modes 0 and I.

These modes reduce drain on the battery.

•Please keep in mind that using systems,

accessories, etc., that consume a great

deal of current when the engine is not

running could result in the battery being

completely drained. Driving or having the

engine running for approximately

15 minutes will help keep the battery

charged.

•The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo

area provides electrical current even with

the ignition switched off, which drains the

battery.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician before driving long dis-

tances. Your retailer will also be able to sup-

ply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and

wiper blades for your use in the event that

problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should be

checked before any long trip:

•Check that engine runs smoothly and that

fuel consumption is normal.

•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

•Have the transmission oil level checked.

•Check condition of drive belts.

•Check state of the battery's charge.

•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as

well), and replace those that are worn.

Check tire pressures.

•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and

steering gear should be checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian only.

•Check all lights, including high beams.

•Reflective warning triangles are legally

required in some states/provinces.

•Have a word with a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician if you intend to

drive in countries where it may be difficult

to obtain the correct fuel.

•Consider your destination. If you will be

driving through an area where snow or ice

are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Cold weather precautions

If you wish to check your vehicle before the

approach of cold weather, the following

advice is worth noting:

•Make sure that the engine coolant con-

tains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other

mixture will reduce freeze protection. This

gives protection against freezing down to

–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled"

antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Dif-

ferent types of antifreeze must not be

mixed.

•Volvo recommends using only genuine

Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this

helps prevent the formation of condensa-

tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely

cold weather conditions it is worthwhile

to add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•The viscosity of the engine oil is impor-

tant. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)

07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

277

improves cold-weather starting as well as

decreasing fuel consumption while the

engine is warming up. Full synthetic

0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in

areas with sustained low temperatures.

•The load placed on the battery is greater

during the winter since the windshield

wipers, lighting, etc., are used more

often. Moreover, the capacity of the bat-

tery decreases as the temperature drops.

In very cold weather, a poorly charged

battery can freeze and be damaged. It is

therefore advisable to check the state of

charge more frequently and spray an anti-

rust oil on the battery posts.

•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving, see

page 310.

•To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from

freezing, add washer solvents containing

antifreeze. This is important since dirt is

often splashed on the windshield during

winter driving, requiring the frequent use

of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer

Solvent should be diluted as follows:

Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer

solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F

(–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and

3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C):

1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water

Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer

solvent and 1 part water.

•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

•Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can

cause damage to the locks.

07 During your trip

Refueling

278

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits. Detergent

gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and

intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit

control gasolines will help ensure good driva-

bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure

whether the gasoline contains deposit control

additives, check with the service station oper-

ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of

external fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con-

verter and must use only unleaded gasoline.

U.S. and Canadian regulations require that

pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be

labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps

have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler

inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel

into a vehicle labelled "unleaded gasoline

only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-

way catalytic converter and the heated oxy-

gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded

gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the

emission control system and could result in

loss of emission warranty coverage. State

and local vehicle inspection programs will

make detection of misfueling easier, possibly

resulting in emission test failure for misfueled

vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con-

tain an octane enhancing additive called

methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri-

carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used,

your Emission Control System perform-

ance may be affected, and the Check

Engine Light (malfunction indicator light)

located on your instrument panel may

light. If this occurs, please return your

vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,

check with the service station operator. To

meet seasonal air quality standards, some

areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy-

genated" fuels; however, the octane ratings

listed on page 279 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol-

ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer-

red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to

15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice

can result in vehicle performance deteriora-

tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel

system. Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

07 During your trip

Refueling

279

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best

performance, but using 87 octane1 or above

will not affect engine reliability.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as

operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a

trailer, or driving for extended periods at

higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis-

able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or

higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully

utilize your engine's capacity, and for the

smoothest possible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be nec-

essary to fill the tank more than once

before a difference in engine operation is

noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi-

tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis-

sion control systems on your vehicle, lead

has been strongly linked to certain forms of

cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked

to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an

area where you must fill your own gas tank,

take precautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler noz-

zle while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the

mouth of the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur-

ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick-

eners, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched

on while refueling your vehicle. If the

phone rings, this may cause a spark that

could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in

fire and injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color-

less, and odorless gas. It is present in all

exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust

fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the

passenger compartment is ventilated, and

immediately return the vehicle to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician for

correction.

1AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

07 During your trip

Refueling

280

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door is located on the right rear

fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel

tank symbol on the information display

)

With the ignition switched off, press and

release the button on the lighting panel to

unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the

fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the

vehicle begins to move forward. An audible

click will be heard when the fuel filler door

relocks.

•If you intend to leave your vehicle while it

is being refueled, this feature enables you

to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving

the fuel filler door unlocked.

•You can also keep the vehicle locked if

you remain inside it during refueling. The

central locking button does not lock the

fuel filler door.

•Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc-

ted and is completely closed after refuel-

ing.

•Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click

indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

•Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.

In addition to causing damage to the

environment, gasolines containing

alcohol can cause damage to painted

surfaces, which may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be

opened manually:

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo com-

partment (on the same side as the fuel

filler door).

2. Grasp the handle on the green cord.

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until

the fuel filler door clicks open.

07 During your trip

Refueling

281

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the

filler cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by

turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine running2.

Turn the ignition off or to position I. If

the ignition is on, an incorrect reading

could occur in the fuel gauge.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle

more than one extra time. Too much

fuel in the tank in hot weather condi-

tions can cause the fuel to overflow.

Overfilling could also cause damage to

the emission control systems.

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if

you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss

of power or other unusual operating con-

ditions, such as engine overheating or

backfiring. A properly tuned engine will

help avoid malfunctions that could dam-

age the three-way catalytic converter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combusti-

ble materials, such as grass or leaves,

which can come into contact with the hot

exhaust system and cause such materials

to ignite under certain wind and weather

conditions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cat-

alytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthor-

ized modifications to the engine, the

Engine Control Module, or the vehicle

may be illegal and can cause three-way

catalytic converter or exhaust system

overheating. This includes: altering fuel

injection settings or components, altering

emission system components or location

or removing components, and/or repea-

ted use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

2If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's

performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

07 During your trip

Refueling

282

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-

gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

are fed into a control module that continu-

ously monitors engine functions and controls

fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the

engine is continuously adjusted for efficient

combustion to help reduce harmful emis-

sions.

07 During your trip

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283

Introduction

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is

determined by factors such as the number of

passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight

of any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat

backrests can be folded down, see page 93.

When loading the cargo area, keep the fol-

lowing in mind:

•Load objects in the cargo area against

the backrest whenever possible.

•Unstable loads can be secured to the

load anchoring eyelets with straps or web

lashings to help keep them from shifting.

•Stop the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading or unloading long

objects. The gear selector can be

knocked out of position by long loads,

which could set the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

•Stop the engine, put the gear selector

in P, and apply the parking brake

when loading or unloading long

objects.

•The vehicle's driving characteristics

may change depending on the weight

and distribution of the load.

•A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a

force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a

head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•The cargo area and rear seat should

not be loaded to a level higher than

2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of

the rear side windows. Objects placed

higher than this level could impede the

function of the Inflatable Curtain.

Power tailgate*

G031965

Power tailgate closing button

Automatic opening

The power tailgate can be opened automati-

cally in the three ways:

•By pressing and holding the but-

ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate

begins to open.

•By pressing and holding the but-

ton on the remote key until the tailgate

begins to open.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

The taillights illuminate automatically when

the automatic open function is used.

07 During your trip

284

CAUTION

Be sure that there is adequate space

above and behind the vehicle before open-

ing the tailgate automatically.

The vehicle should not be driven or moved

with the tailgate in the open position. How-

ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tail-

gate in the open position, the automatic

closing function will be inoperative until

one of the following occurs:

•The tailgate is closed manually

•The ignition is switched off and the key

is removed for approximately 10

minutes (the tailgate will function again

after restart).

NOTE

If the tailgate has been opened and closed

continuously for more than 60 seconds,

the automatic function will be deactivated

to avoid overloading the electrical system.

The automatic function can be used again

after approximately 10 minutes.

If the vehicle's battery has been dis-

charged or disconnected, the tailgate must

be opened and closed once manually to

reset the system.

Programming the tailgate opening

angle

The tailgate's maximum opening angle can

be programmed, which can be useful, for

example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a

garage with a low ceiling.

To do so:

•Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the

desired maximum opening angle and

press the tailgate's closing button for at

least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is

released, programming is complete.

•To remove this programming, open the

tailgate manually to a higher opening

angle.

Automatic closing

The power tailgate can be closed by pressing

the button on the tailgate (see the

illustration) or by pressing it down.

NOTE

If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the

weight of snow or strong wind, it will close

automatically.

WARNING

Be sure that no one is near the tailgate

when it is opened or closed automatically.

The tailgate should never be obstructed in

any way when it is operated.

Interrupting automatic opening/closing

Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can

be interrupted in four ways:

•By pressing the button on the

lighting panel.

•By pressing the button on the

remote key.

•By pressing the button on the lower edge

of the tailgate.

•By pressing the rubber-covered button

under the outer handle on the tailgate.

If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate

will stop and reopen.

Pinch protection

If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being

operated, the pinch protection function is

activated.

•If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-

cal function will be switched off and the

07 During your trip

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285

tailgate will be released from the electrical

system.

•If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop

and reopen.

Operating the tailgate manually

The power tailgate can be disconnected from

the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pull-

ing the outer handle twice. The tailgate can

then be opened/closed manually.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded down

for additional loading space, see page 95.

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of

the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to

help anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

•Cover sharp edges on long loads to

help prevent injury to occupants.

Secure the load to help prevent shift-

ing during sudden stops.

•Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining

straps.

•Always secure the load to help prevent

it from moving in the event of sudden

stops.

•Switch off the engine, apply the park-

ing brake and put the gear selector in

P when loading and unloading the

vehicle.

Grocery bag holder*

G017745

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo

area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo

area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

07 During your trip

286

Roof loads

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-

ries. Observe the following points when in

use:

•To avoid damaging your vehicle and to

achieve maximum safety when driving,

we recommend using the load carriers

that Volvo has developed especially for

your vehicle.

•Volvo-approved removable roof racks are

designed to carry the maximum allowable

roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).

For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-

ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

•Never exceed the rack manufacturer's

weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-

mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads

evenly.

•Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the

load.

•Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-

ate tie-down equipment.

•Check periodically that the load carriers

and load are properly secured.

•Remember that the vehicle's center of

gravity and handling change when you

carry a load on the roof.

•The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel

consumption will increase with the size of

the load.

•Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast

cornering and hard braking.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

Steel cargo grid*

G031978

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel

grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo

area from moving forward into the passenger

compartment.

Folding the grid up/down

Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it

rearward/upward, or push it downward/

forward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with the

optional cargo area cover, the grid must

be folded down before the cargo area

cover is put in place.

Installing the steel cargo grid

For information about the necessary tools

and procedures for installing/removing the

steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly

instructions1 that were included when the grid

was purchased.

Cargo area cover*

G031977

Use

•Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it

into the holes in the rear cargo area pil-

lars.

•To retract (roll up) the cover, release it

from the holes and guide it toward the

rear seat backrest.

Installing the cover

1. Press the end piece on one side of the

cargo area cover into the retaining

bracket in the side panel of the cargo

area .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until they

click into place . The red mark will no

longer be visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover are

securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out-

ward. The other end will release automati-

cally from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's

rear flap

The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-

zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled

up). To fold it down:

–Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-

ports and fold it down.

1Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, it

should be removed before a child seat is

attached to the child restraint anchors.

Cargo net*

G034213

Cargo net mounted in rear position

Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo

net made of strong nylon fabric that helps

prevent objects in the cargo area from mov-

ing forward into the passenger compartment.

The net can be attached in two different pla-

ces:

•Rear position: behind the rear seat back-

rest

•Front position: behind the front seat

backrests

WARNING

•Be sure that the cargo net's upper

attachment hooks are properly

inserted in the brackets and that the

lower straps are correctly attached

and pulled taut.

•A damaged cargo net should never be

used.

•Objects in the cargo area should be

securely anchored, even if the cargo

net is correctly installed and in use.

Mounting the cargo net

The cargo net is easiest to put in place

through one of the rear doors.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that

the upper hinged rod is straight and

locked in position.

2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or

rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure

that the lock on the lower strap is facing

toward you.

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the

opposite bracket.

– Be sure to press the end hooks on the

rod as far forward as possible in the

brackets.

Cargo net in rear position

4. Mounting in the rear position: With the

net's rod attached to the rear upper

brackets, hook the lower straps in the

floor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the net

strap taut.

07 During your trip

Cargo area

289

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With the

net's rod attached to the front upper

brackets, hook the lower straps in the

eyelets in the front seat rails. Attaching

the net is easier if the front seat backrests

are upright and the seats are moved

slightly forward.

If the front seats are moved rearward,

they should not press hard against the

net.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against the

cargo net could damage the net and/or its

brackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

Removing and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the locks on

the straps and pull out a small section of

the strap.

Press in the catches on the straps' hooks

and remove the hooks from the eyelet.

Fold up the net's rod at the center and

roll up the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be stored

under floor of the cargo area.

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

290

Introduction

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer

hitches that are specially designed for the

vehicle.

NOTE

See page 369 for the maximum trailer and

tongue weights recommended by Volvo.

•Observe the legal requirements of the

state/province in which the vehicles are

•All Volvo models are equipped with

energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-

ers. Trailer hitch installation should not

interfere with the proper operation of this

bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any

particular problems, but take into considera-

tion:

•Increase tire pressure to recommended

full pressure. See the tire inflation table

on page 303.

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing

heavy trailers during the first 620 miles

(1,000 km).

•Maximum speed when towing a trailer:

50 mph (80 km/h).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine cool-

ant temperature should be closely

watched when driving in hot climates or

hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off

the air conditioner if the temperature

gauge needle enters the red range.

•If the automatic transmission begins to

overheat, a message will be displayed in

the text window.

•Avoid overload and other abusive opera-

tion.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-

ity, and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes

with the towing vehicle brakes to provide

a safe stop (check and observe state/

local regulations).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•More frequent vehicle maintenance is

required.

•Remove the ball holder when the hitch is

not being used.

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult your nearest author-

ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-

tion.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's

safety wire must be correctly fastened

to the hole or hook provided in the

trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety

wire should never be fastened to or

wound around the drawbar ball.

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

291

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer

on a hill, apply the parking brake

before putting the gear selector in P.

Always follow the trailer manufactur-

er's recommendations for wheel

chocking.

•When starting on a hill, put the gear

selector in D before releasing the park-

ing brake. See also page 138 for more

detailed information about starting off

on a hill while towing a trailer.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make

sure the gear you select does not put

too much strain on the engine (using

too high a gear).

•The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch

may be rated for trailers heavier than

the vehicle is designed to tow. Please

adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer

weights.

•Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines

of more than 15%.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer

hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer

has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)

G010496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt

out of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-

bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the

one in the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch

assembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end

of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking

bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the

ball holder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch

assembly.

NOTE

A cover for the hitch assembly is also

included in the kit.

07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

292

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer

when the vehicle and trailer have begun to

sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and

Traction Control system (DSTC). See page

142 for information on DSTC.

Function

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway

for various reasons. Normally this only occurs

at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer

is overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis-

tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying

at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph

(70-90 km/h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud-

den, strong crosswind

•The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

•The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru-

ment panel will flash when TSA is working

•If the driver switches off the DSTC sys-

tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also

be switched off (but will be on again the

next time the engine is started)

•TSA may not intervene when the vehicle

and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries

to compensate for the swaying motion by

moving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-

cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control

the vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors the

vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

movement. If the system detects a tendency

to sway, the brakes are applied individually

on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing

effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often

enough to enable the driver to regain control

of the vehicle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swaying

motion, the brakes are applied to all of the

wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is

equipped with brakes, and engine power is

temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion

begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer

have once again become stable, TSA will no

stop regulating the brakes/engine power and

the driver regains control of the vehicle.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

293

Towing eyelet

Location of the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the

floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire

and may be partially concealed. This eye฀

let must be screwed into the positions

provided on the right sides of either the

front or rear bumper (see illustration).

There are two different types of covers

over the openings for the towing eyelet

and they have to be opened differently.

•If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,

etc., into the notch and pry open the

edge of the cover. Open the cover

completely and remove it.

•If the cover has a mark along one edge

or in a corner, press the mark while

prying out the opposite side/corner

using a coin, etc. Open the cover and

remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by

hand and then using the tire iron until it is

securely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to its stor-

age location.

Press the cover for the attachment point back

into position.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is being towed, the

ignition should be in mode II (in mode

I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac-

tivated). See page 89 for more infor-

mation about ignition modes.

•Never remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when the vehicle is being

towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,

the remote key must remain inside the

vehicle.

•The power brakes and power steering

will not function when the engine is not

running. Approximately 5 times more

pressure will be required on the brake

pedal and the steering wheel will be

considerably harder to turn.

•The towing eyelets must not be used

for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or

for any similar purpose involving

severe strain.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

294

Towing the vehicle

1. With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot1, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to

activate ignition mode II.

2. The remote key must remain in the igni-

tion slot2 for the entire time that the vehi-

cle is being towed.

3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing

vehicle slows down by applying light

pressure on the brake pedal. This will

help prevent jarring movements of the

vehicle being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop

the vehicle being towed.

CAUTION

General towing precautions:

•Please check with state and local

authorities before attempting this type

of towing, as vehicles being towed are

subject to regulations regarding maxi-

mum towing speed, length and type of

towing device, lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach

jumper cables (see page 126) to pro-

vide current for releasing the electric

parking brake and to move the gear

selector from the P position to N. If

this is not possible, see page 131 for

information about manually overriding

the shiftlock system to move the gear

selector from P to N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h).

Do not exceed the maximum allowable

towing speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels

on ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•The vehicle should only be towed in

the forward direction.

Having the vehicle towed by a tow

truck

Call for professional help from an authorized

towing company.Volvo recommends the use

of flat bed equipment.

The towing eyelet may be used to pull the

vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck if:

•The angle of the tow truck’s ramp is not

more than 12 degrees from a horizontal

plane

•The vehicle’s wheels rotate freely and roll

straight ahead

WARNING

No person or object should be behind the

tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled

up onto the flatbed.

1Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

2For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

07 During your trip

Emergency towing

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295

CAUTION

•The vehicle should always be towed in

the forward direction.

•Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*

that are being towed with the front

wheels off the ground should not be

towed at a speed above approx.

45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be

towed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

•If the vehicle is being towed on a flat

bed truck, the towing eyelet must not

be used to pull the vehicle up onto the

flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the

flat bed. Consult the tow truck opera-

tor.

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information .............................................................................. 298
Tire inflation........................................................................................... 301
Inflation pressure ................................................................................. 303
Tire designations .................................................................................. 304
Glossary of tire terminology ................................................................. 306
Vehicle loading ..................................................................................... 307
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................................... 309
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ............................................... 310
Temporary Spare ................................................................................. 311
Tire Sealing System*............................................................................. 312
Changing a wheel ................................................................................ 318
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 322

WHEELS AND TIRES

08 Wheels and tires

General information

298

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel

combination designed to provide maxi-

mum dry pavement performance with con-

sideration for hydroplaning resistance.

They may be more susceptible to road

hazard damage and, depending on driving

conditions, may achieve a tread life of less

than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this

vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced

AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not

designed for winter driving, and should be

replaced with winter tires when weather

conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher

degree of road holding on slippery surfaces

than tires without the "all-season" rating.

However, for optimum road holding on icy or

snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable

winter tires on all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new

tires are the same size designation, type

(radial) and preferably from the same manu-

facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is

a risk of altering the car's roadholding and

handling characteristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As

of 2000, the manufacturing week and year

(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)

will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513

means that the tire illustrated was manufac-

tured during week 15 of 2013).

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire

wear is affected by a number of factors such

as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving

style, etc.

NOTE

•If the tires are rotated, they should

only be moved from front to rear or

vice versa. They should never be rota-

ted left to right/right to left.

•Ideally, tire rotation should be done the

first time after approximately 3,000

miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at

6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals.

Some customers find that tire rotation

may help to get extra mileage from tire

life.

•Tire rotation should only be performed

if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, fre-

quent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet

(U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

08 Wheels and tires

General information

}}

299

process. The temporary spare1 should also

be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has

never been used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT

stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Tread wear indicator

G021829

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. When

approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the

tread, these strips become visible and indi-

cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires

with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very

poor traction.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and

size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of

the same make (manufacturer) will prevent

alteration of the driving characteristics of the

vehicle.

Improving tire economy

•Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire

inflation table on page 303.

•Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard

braking and tire screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

•When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the

rear wheels to reduce the chance of over-

steer during hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the

tire

•When switching between summer and

winter tires, mark the tires to indicate

where they were mounted on the car,

e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only

one direction are marked with an arrow

on the sidewall.

•Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's

braking properties and ability to force

aside rain, snow and slush.

1Option or accessory on some models

08 Wheels and tires

General information

300

•The tires with the most tread should

always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of

skidding).

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored

on their sides or standing upright, but should

not be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be

stored in close proximity to solvents, gaso-

line, oils, etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's

stability and handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

301

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

See the tire inflation table on page 303. A tire

inflation pressure placard is also located on

the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of

the driver's door opening). This placard indi-

cates the designation of the factory-mounted

tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits

and inflation pressure.

NOTE

•The placards shown indicate inflation

pressure for the tires installed on the

vehicle at the factory only.

•A certain amount of air seepage from

the tires occurs naturally and tire pres-

sure fluctuates with seasonal changes

in temperature. Always check tire

pressure regularly.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare, at least

once a month and before long trips. You

are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service sta-

tion gauges may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation

pressure for optimum tire performance

and wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may

cause uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load

carrying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur,

tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-

degree temperature drop causes a corres-

ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres-

sure. Check your tire pressures frequently

and adjust them to the proper pressure,

which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor-

mation placard or certification label.

Checking tire pressure

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when

the tires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the

surrounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

302

After driving a distance of approximately

1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be

hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-

tance to pump your tire(s), check and record

the tire pressure first and add the appropriate

air pressure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The

tires are hot from driving and it is normal for

pressures to increase above recommended

cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom-

mended cold inflation pressure could be sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one

tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto

the valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air

pressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After pumping the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure

there are no nails or other objects

embedded that could puncture the tire

and cause an air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there

are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other

irregularities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire,

including the spare.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the cen-

ter of the valve. Then recheck the

pressure with your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires require higher infla-

tion pressure than the other tires. Con-

sult the tire inflation pressure table on

page 303 or see the inflation pressure

placard.

Tire ratings

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-

low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

See page 304 for an explanation of the load

rating on the sidewall of the tire.

08 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

303

Tire inflation pressure table

The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 301 for its location) for informa-

tion specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T125/80R17

61 (420) 61 (420)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

304

Information on the sidewall

5 6 7 89

G010753

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the side-

wall of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire

designation is an example only and that

this particular tire may not be available on

your vehicle.

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its

width in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the

symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting

run flat tires1. See page 324 for more

information about these tires).

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example,

a load index of 95 equals a maximum

load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi-

mum speed at which the tire is designed

to be driven for extended periods of time,

carrying a permissible load for the vehi-

cle, and with correct inflation pressure.

For example, H indicates a speed rating

of 130 mph (210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they

are not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All

Terrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all fed-

eral standards. The next two numbers or

letters are the plant code where it was

manufactured, the next two are the tire

size code and the last four numbers rep-

resent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, 1510 means that the

tire was manufactured during week 15 of

2010. The numbers in between are mar-

keting codes used at the manufacturer's

discretion. This information helps a tire

manufacturer identify a tire for safety

recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and side-

wall. Tire manufacturers also must indi-

cate the ply materials in the tire and the

sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly-

ester, and others.

1Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

305

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's

tire information placard located on the B-

Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your

vehicle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see page 309 for more informa-

tion.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the

tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-

turer.

08 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

306

Terms

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-

ings, notes or warnings such as standard

load, radial tubeless, etc.

•Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A

number on the sidewall of each tire pro-

viding information about the tire brand

and manufacturing plant, tire size and

date of manufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or

Metric tires designed to carry a maximum

load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tires load carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maxi-

mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for

Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres-

sure beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire's load carrying capabil-

ity.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the

side of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire

next to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-

eter of the tire that contacts the road

when mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire

or a tire and tube assembly upon which

the tire beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the

tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that

are mounted on a vehicle at the factory.

This information can be found on the tire

inflation placard(s) located on the driver's

side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table

in this chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same tempera-

ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This

temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours.

08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

307

Loads

Properly loading your vehicle will provide

maximum return of vehicle design perform-

ance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-

self with the following terms for determining

your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without

a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does

not include passengers, cargo, or optional

equipment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer

to the section "Towing a trailer" on page

290.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle

must never exceed its maximum permissible

weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

NOTE

•The location of the various labels in

your vehicle can be found on page

366.

•A table listing important weight limits

for your vehicle can be found on page

369.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-

cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kilo-

grams or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX"

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be

five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 –

750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual1 to deter-

mine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

1See page 290.

08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

308

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire

overheating resulting in permanent

deformation or catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with

lower load carrying capacities than the

tires that were original equipment on

the vehicle because this will lower the

vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires

with the correct load carrying capacity.

Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-

tion.

08 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

309

Quality grading information

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the

tread shoulder and maximum section

width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tes-

ted under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The relative per-

formance of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and many

depart significantly from the norm due to var-

iation in driving habits, maintenance practices

and differences in road characteristics and

climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con-

trolled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perform-

ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-

ing) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to

the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-

pate heat when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a minimum level of perform-

ance that all passenger vehicle tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand-

ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly infla-

ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and tire failure.

08 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

310

Winter driving conditions

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with

the following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved

snow chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"

tires and wheels are installed and are of a

size different than the original tires and

wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT

be used. Sufficient clearances between

chains and brakes, suspension and body

components must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere

with brake components and therefore

CANNOT be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front

wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the

assembly of snow chains/traction devi-

ces.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional

snow chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•Use single-sided snow chains only.

•Always follow the chain manufactur-

er's installation instructions carefully.

Install chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufactur-

er's specified maximum speed limit.

(Under no circumstances should you

exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as

well as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1

Tires for winter use:

•Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of

snow or icy driving conditions are

strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires

to help retain the highest degree of trac-

tion.

•It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an

unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire

road grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry

roads in warm weather. They should be

removed when the winter driving season

has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in 300 –

600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which

the vehicle should be driven as smoothly

as possible to give the studs the opportu-

nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires

should have the same rotational direction

throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-

tions restricting the use of studded winter

tires before installing such tires.

1Where permitted

08 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

311

Spare tire

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a

"Temporary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placard

on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should

be maintained irrespective of which position

on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is

used on.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new one

can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a

temporary replacement for a punctured

tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-

ble by a standard tire. Road holding and

handling may be affected with the "Tem-

porary Spare" in use. Do not exceed

50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheels

of different dimensions or with a spare tire

other than the one that came with the vehi-

cle. The use of different size wheels can

seriously damage your car's transmission.

1Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Location

Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire

sealing system* that enables you to tempo-

rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re-

inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation

pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, a

container for the sealing compound, wiring to

connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical

system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a

hose used to connect the system to the tire’s

inflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor has

been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front

tunnel console, on the rear side of the center

console in the rear seat and in the cargo

area*, see page 226.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the

floor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only

intended to seal holes on the tire’s

tread area, not the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot

be repaired with the tire sealing sys-

tem.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

•After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther

than approximately 120 miles (200

km).

•Have the tire inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician

as soon as possible to determine if it

can be permanently repaired or must

be replaced.

•The vehicle should not be driven faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a

tire that has been temporarily repaired

with the tire sealing system.

•After using the tire sealing system,

drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer-

ing maneuvers and sudden stops.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313

Tire sealing system–overview

Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the

compressor)

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind

when using the tire sealing system:

•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in

the illustration) contains 1) rubber

latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These

substances are harmful if swallowed.

•The contents of this bottle may cause

allergic skin reactions or otherwise be

potentially harmful to the respiratory

tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-

tem, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•Keep out of reach of children.

•Do not ingest the contents.

•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin.

•Wash thoroughly after handling.

First aid:

•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with

soap and water. Get medical attention

if symptoms occur.

•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for

least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting

the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-

cal attention if symptoms occur.

•Inhalation: Move the exposed person

to fresh air. If irritation persists, get

medical attention.

•Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting

unless directed to do so by medical

personnel. Get medical attention.

•Disposal: Dispose of this material and

its container to a hazardous or special

waste collection point.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tire sealing system–temporarily

repairing a flat tire

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two

stages:

•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping

sealing compound into the tire. The car is

then driven a short distance to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,

etc.) from the tire before using the sealing

system.

•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is

checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

•Never leave the tire sealing system

unattended when it is operating.

•Keep the tire sealing system away

from children.

•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off

the road and away from moving traffic.

•Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-

tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs,

wash the affected area immediately with

soap and water.

3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle

of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to

keep it securely in place and help prevent

sealing compound leakage. Once in place,

the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must

be done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s

inflation valve and screw the tire sealing

system’s hose connector onto the valve

as tightly as possible by hand.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315

6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-volt

sockets is being used while the compres-

sor is in operation.

7. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the

vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,

or outdoors, before using the system.

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres-

sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi-

tion I.

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being infla-

ted when the compressor is in opera-

tion.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall

or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.

The vehicle should not be driven if this

occurs. Contact a towing service or

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if

applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily

show an increase in pressure to approxi-

mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing

compound is being pumped into the tire.

The pressure should return to a normal

level after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar).

Switch off the compressor briefly to get a

clear reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi

(1.8 bar) after approximately seven

minutes, turn off the compressor. In this

case, the hole is too large to be sealed and

the vehicle should not be driven.

10. Switch off the compressor and discon-

nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt

socket.

11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After pumping the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the

use of the sealing compound may lead to

incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare

cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.

Use the tire sealing system to check and

adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres-

sure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be

used again to check the tire’s inflation

pressure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the

bottle removed and properly disposed

of.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering

behavior, or noises should occur while

driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle

in a safe place. Recheck the tire for

bumps, cracks, or other visible damage,

and recheck its inflation pressure. If the

pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not

continue driving. Have the vehicle towed

to a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as

described in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure.

If the tire needs to be inflated, start the

tire sealing system’s compressor. If nec-

essary, release air from the tire by turning

the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1

hour, check the inflation pressure in the

damaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if:

•the tire sealing system has been used to

repair a tire

•the container’s expiration date has

passed (see the date on decal).

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bot-

tle, the hose, and certain other system

components must be replaced. Please

consult your Volvo retailer for replace-

ment parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-

ration date has passed, please take it

to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station

that can properly dispose of harmful

substances.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s

inflation valve and screw the hose con-

nector onto the valve as tightly as possi-

ble by hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure

the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated

place, or outdoors, before using the

system. The parking brake should be

securely applied and the gear selector

should be in the P (park) position.

•Children should never be left unatten-

ded in the vehicle when the engine is

running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly

to get a clear reading from the pressure

gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure.

If the tire needs to be inflated, start the

tire sealing system’s compressor (press

the on/off switch to position I). If neces-

sary, release air from the tire by turning

the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct

inflation pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After pumping the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the

12-volt socket.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removing a wheel

Location of jack*, towing eyelet1 and tools*

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is only intended for tempo-

rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as

soon as possible. The car's handling may be

altered by the use of the spare wheel. The

correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is

stated in the tire pressure table on page 303

and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's

side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door

opening.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a

temporary replacement for a punctured

tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-

ble by a standard tire. Road holding and

handling may be affected with the “Tem-

porary Spare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven with

more than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the rim side down. There are two

foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and

one over/inside. The upper one contains all

tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the

spare wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Open the floor hatch.

2. Undo the retaining bolt.

3. Lift out the foam block.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The other two blocks can remain in the spare

wheel well.

After use

The foam block and spare wheel must be

replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow

on the upper foam block. It should point for-

ward.

Changing a wheel

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tow-

ing eyelet and the wheel cover removal

tool* stowed under the floor of the trunk.

3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-

ble) using the removal tool or remove the

wheel cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground

with wooden blocks or large stones.

1The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 293 for its location.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

319

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug

wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed into

the lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use

the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen

the wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting

downward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Jack attachment points

7. There are two jack attachment points on

each side of the vehicle. Position the jack

correctly in the attachment (see the illus-

tration) and crank while simultaneously

guiding the base of the jack to the

ground. The base of the jack must be flat

on a level, firm, non-slippery surface.

Before raising the vehicle, check that the

jack is still correctly positioned in the

attachment.

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

320

WARNING

There are two attachment points near the

rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most

attachment point is intended for the jack

(see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and

remove the wheel.

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the

jack attachment.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,

non-slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to

be extended under a vehicle suppor-

ted by a jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be dam-

aged.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary sit-

uations such as changing wheels in the

event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came

with your particular model should be used

to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be

lifted more frequently or for a prolonged

period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-

ommended. Always follow this device’s

instructions for use.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the wheel nuts

08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

321

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-

wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

The opening in the wheel cover for the

tire's inflation valve must be positioned

over the valve.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

322

Introduction

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses

sensors mounted in the tire valves to check

inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is

moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit

inflation pressure data to a receiver located in

the vehicle.

When low inflation pressure is detected or if a

sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will

light up the tire pressure warning light ( )

(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument

panel and will display one of the following

messages in the text window: Tire pressure

low or

Tire needs air now.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure

warning light will flash for approximately

1 minute and Tire press. syst Service

required will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-

ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-

minates, you should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

er's responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-

tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-

cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-

tion telltale after replacing one or more tires

or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

1Not available in all markets or in all models.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

323

allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-

erly.

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does

not replace normal tire maintenance. For

information on correct tire pressure, please

refer to the tire inflation pressure table in

this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message

has been displayed, and the tire pressure

warning light has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres-

sure (consult the tire pressure placard or

the inflation pressure table on page 303.

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to

drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This

will erase the warning text and the warn-

ing light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to

tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of

the vehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing or

replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/

tires on the vehicle:

•Only the factory-mounted wheels are

equipped with TPMS sensors in the

valves.

•If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo-

rary spare tire, this tire does not have a

TPMS sensor.

•If wheels without TPMS sensors are

mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS

SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis-

played each time the vehicle is driven

above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or

more.

•Once TPMS sensors are properly instal-

led, the warning message should not

reappear. If the message is still displayed,

drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to

erase the message.

•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors

be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi-

cle. Volvo does not recommend moving

sensors back and forth between sets of

wheels.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves,

press the pump's mouthpiece straight

onto the valve to help avoid bending or

otherwise damaging the valve.

CAUTION

•After pumping the tires, always rein-

stall the valve cap to help avoid dam-

age to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal

caps could corrode and become diffi-

cult to remove.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

•If you change to tires with a different

recommended inflation pressure, the

TPMS system must be recalibrated to

these tires. On U.S. models, this must

be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician. On Canadian

models, see the following section

"Recalibrating TPMS."

•If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-

sor is moved to another wheel, the

sensor's seal, nut, and valve core

should be replaced.

•When installing TPMS sensors, the

vehicle must be parked for at least

15 minutes with the ignition off. If the

vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a

TPMS error message will be displayed.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models

only)*

In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-

librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-

mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

tion pressure table on page 303), for exam-

ple, if higher inflation pressure is necessary

when transporting heavy loads, etc.

This is done in the vehicle's menu system.

See page 201 for a description of the menu

system.

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure

and put the ignition in mode I or II (see

page 89 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tyre pressure

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre

pressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above

25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at

least 10 minutes.

> When the calibration message is no

longer displayed, TPMS has been

recalibrated to the new inflation pres-

sure.

Activating/deactivating TPMS

(Canadian models only)*

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page

89 for additional information).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tyre pressure

4. Select Tyre pressure system and press

OK/MENU to turn the system on or off.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*

Self-supporting run flat tires are available as

optional equipment. The vehicle must be

equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) if tires of this type are instal-

led.

Tires of this type have specially reinforced

sidewalls that make it possible to continue

driving to a limited extent even though the tire

has lost some or all of its inflation pressure.

These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-

mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).

If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-

low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instru-

ment panel and a text message is also dis-

played. If this happens, reduce speed to not

more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine

which tire is damaged. To find the damaged

tire, check the inflation pressure in all four

tires.

08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

325

WARNING

•SST tires should only be mounted by

service technicians who are familiar

with tires of this type.

•SST tires may only be mounted on

vehicles equipped with TPMS.

•Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire

has lost inflation pressure.

•Do not drive farther than 50 miles

(80 km) before replacing a damaged

SST tire.

•Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard

braking or fast turns.

•SST tires must be replaced if they are

damaged. A tire of this type cannot be

repaired.

326
Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 328
Maintaining your car............................................................................. 329
Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 331
Engine oil............................................................................................... 332
Fluids..................................................................................................... 334
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 336
Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 343
Battery................................................................................................... 346
Fuses..................................................................................................... 350
Vehicle care........................................................................................... 359

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

09 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

328

Introduction

Periodic maintenance will help keep your

vehicle running well. The maintenance serv-

ices contain several checks that require spe-

cial instruments and tools and therefore must

be performed by a qualified technician. To

keep your Volvo in top condition, specify

time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts

and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions

to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information" booklet, are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

procedures outlined in the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet, many of

which will positively affect your vehicle's

emissions, should be performed as indicated.

It is recommended that receipts for vehicle

emission maintenance be retained in case

questions arise concerning maintenance.

Inspection and maintenance should also be

performed anytime a malfunction is observed

or suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and

Canadian regulations, the following list of

warranties is provided.

•New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint

Systems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other war-

ranties are provided as required by state/

provincial law. Refer to your separate War-

ranty and Service Records Information book-

let for detailed information concerning each

of the warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

NOTE

•Refer to your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet for a

comprehensive service and mainte-

nance schedule up to 150,000 miles

(240,000 km). This program contains

inspections and services necessary for

the proper function of your vehicle and

includes components that affect vehi-

cle emissions.

•The Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet also contains

detailed information concerning the

warranties that apply to your vehicle.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

329

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-

vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried out

between the normally scheduled maintenance

services.

Each time the car is refueled:

•Check the engine oil level.

•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,

headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:

•Check cold tire pressure in all tires.

Inspect the tires for wear.

•Check that engine coolant and other fluid

levels are between the indicated "min"

and "max" markings.

•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass

cleaner and soft paper towels.

•Wipe driver information displays with a

soft cloth.

•Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-

rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose

terminal connector, or a battery near the

end of its useful service life. Consult your

Volvo retailer for additional information.

As needed:

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to

reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by

salt residues.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents

at the base of the windshield, and from other

places where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualified

technicians is available online for purchase

or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the

two jack attachments points should be used.

They are specially reinforced to bear the

weight of the vehicle. A garage jack can also

be placed under the front of the engine sup-

port frame. Take care not to damage the

splash guard under the engine. Ensure that

the jack is positioned so that the vehicle can-

not slide off it. Always use axle stands or sim-

ilar structures.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle,

the front and rear lift arm pads should be

centered under the reinforced lift plates on

the inboard edge of the sill rail (see illustra-

tion).

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diag-

nostic information about your vehicle's emis-

sion controls. It can light the Check Engine

light (MIL) if it detects an emission control

"fault." A "fault" is a component or system

that is not performing within an expected

range. A fault may be permanent or tempo-

rary. OBD II will store a message about any

fault.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

330

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was

lit, but went out without any action on

your part, OBD II will still have a recorded

fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail,

depending on the inspection practices in

your area.

•If you had recent service that required

disconnecting the battery, OBD II diag-

nostic information may be incomplete

and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle

that is not ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.

A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/

highway driving is typically needed to

allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your

Volvo retailer can provide you with more

information on planning a trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment

331

Opening and closing the hood

G031911

Pull the lever located under the left side

of the dash to release the hood lock. An

information symbol will illuminate when

the hood is open.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the release

control (located under the right front edge

of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly when

closed.

Engine compartment, overview

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

The appearance of the engine compartment

may vary depending on engine model.

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of the

engine compartment, behind the radiator)

may start or continue to operate (for up to

6 minutes) after the engine has been

switched off.

WARNING

Before performing any operations in the

engine compartment, the ignition should

always be completely switched off (in

mode 0, see page 89) and there should be

no remote keys in the passenger compart-

ment. The gear selector should be in the P

(park) position. If the engine has been run-

ning, wait until it has cooled before touch-

ing any components in the engine com-

partment.

The distributor ignition system operates at

very high voltages. Special safety precau-

tions must be followed to prevent injury.

Always turn the ignition off when:

•Replacing distributor ignition compo-

nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•Do not touch any part of the distributor

ignition system while the engine is run-

ning. This may result in unintended

movements and body injury.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

332

Checking the engine oil

The oil level should be checked at regular

intervals, particularly during the period up to

the first scheduled maintenance service.

•See page 371 for oil specifications.

•Also, refer to the Warranty and Service

Records information booklet for informa-

tion on oil change intervals and oil speci-

fications.

CAUTION

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the

oil level becomes too low.

•Oil that is lower than the specified

quality can damage the engine.

•Volvo does not recommend the use of

oil additives.

•Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil con-

sumption.

•Oil changes should be carried out by a

trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

Checking and adding oil

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

•The car should be parked on a level

surface.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10 – 15 minutes after the engine has

been switched off.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a

lint-free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and

check the oil level. The level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

333

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if

necessary until the level is near the MAX

mark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

334

Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

See page 372 for information on cooling sys-

tem capacities.

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling sys-

tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti-

freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and

antifreeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant

may not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it

should be flushed with clean water or

premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled

with the correct mixture of water/anti-

freeze.

•The cooling system must always be

kept filled to the correct level, and the

level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there

can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage.

Check coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has

a lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•Never remove the expansion tank cap

while the engine is warm. Wait until the

engine cools.

•If it is necessary to top off the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under the

round cover at the rear of the engine com-

partment. The round cover must be removed

first before the reservoir cap can be

accessed.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

335

The brake fluid should always be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-

ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that

there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replaced

according to the intervals specified in the

Warranty and Service Records Information

booklet.

When driving under extremely hard condi-

tions (mountain driving, etc), it may be neces-

sary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake-related

message is shown in the information

display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•Dot 4 should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the

fluid. The level must be between the MIN

and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The fluid level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks. For

capacities and recommended fluid grade, see

page 372.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the power

steering system or if the vehicle has no

electrical current and must be towed, it is

still possible to steer the vehicle. However,

keep in mind that greater effort will be

required to turn the steering wheel.

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Introduction

All bulb specifications are listed on page 341.

The following bulbs should only be replaced

by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician:

•Active Bending Lights

•Daytime running lights, front parking

lights

•Front side marker lights

•Turn signals in the door mirrors

•Approach lighting in the door mirrors

•Interior lighting

•Glove compartment lighting

•Rear parking lights

•Rear side marker lights

•Rear turn signals

•LED bulbs

NOTE

•For information regarding any bulbs

not mentioned in this section, please

contact your Volvo retailer or a trained

and authorized Volvo service techni-

cian.

•Always switch off the ignition before

starting to replace a bulb.

•If an error message remains in the dis-

play after a faulty bulb has been

replaced, contact an authorized Volvo

workshop.

•Condensation may form temporarily on

the inside of the lenses of exterior

lights such as headlights, fog lights, or

taillights. This is normal and the lights

are designed to withstand moisture.

Normally, condensation will dissipate

after the lights have been on for a

short time.

•The optional Active Bending Light

bulbs contain trace amounts of mer-

cury. These bulbs should always be

disposed of by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your

fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a

deposit on the reflector, which will damage

it.

WARNING

•The engine should not be running

when changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just

prior to replacing bulbs in the head-

light housing, please keep in mind that

components in the engine compart-

ment will be hot.

WARNING

•Active Bending Lights* – due to the

high voltage used by these headlights,

these bulbs should only be replaced

by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

•Turn off the lights and remove the

remote key from the ignition before

changing any bulbs.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

337

Headlight housing

The entire headlight housing must be lifted

out when replacing all front bulbs.

Removing the headlight housing

Pull out the headlight housing's locking

pins.

Pull the headlight housing straight out.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull on

the connector itself and not on the wiring.

Unplug the wiring connector by holding

down the clip with your thumb.

Pull the connector out with the other

hand.

5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it

on a soft surface to avoid scratching the

lens.

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

When reinserting the housing, be sure that

the long locking pin is securely in place in

both of its retaining clamps.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into

place.

2. Reinsert the headlight housing and lock-

ing pins. Check that they are correctly

inserted.

The headlight housing must be properly

in place and the wiring connector cor-

rectly reconnected before the lighting is

switched on or the remote key is inserted

into the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

Removing the cover to access the

bulbs

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

338

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 336.

1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws

(3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The

screws should not be removed com-

pletely.

2. Push the cover to the side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

Low beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 336).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 337).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder

downward.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it

snaps into place. It can only be secured

in one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

High beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 336).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 337).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-

clockwise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and

turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can

only be secured in one position.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

}}

339

Extra high beam1

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 336).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

page 337).

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the

bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the head-

light housing by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the holder. It can only

be inserted in one way.

6. Press the bulb holder into position in the

headlight housing.

7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the

bulb holder.

8. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Turn signals

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see page 336).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it out of the

headlight housing.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing

it in slightly and turning it counterclock-

wise.

5. Press the new bulb into the holder and

turn it clockwise.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing and turn it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Rear fog lights

The rear fog lights can be reached from

behind the bumper

1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise.

2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing

it in and turning it counterclockwise.

1Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

340

3. Insert a new bulb, press it downward and

turn it clockwise.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

Location of taillight bulbs

Taillight lens, right side

Parking/side marker lights (LED)

Brake light

Backup light

Turn signal

Brake lights (LED)

Brake lights and taillights

The brake lights and taillights are replaced

from inside the cargo area.

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing

it in and turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it

clockwise.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise.

License plate lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing

and pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and

tighten the screws.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 341

Cargo area lighting

G031942

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so

that the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

it back into the bulb housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the glass

and carefully exert upward pressure to

release the retaining lugs.

2. Snap out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb

straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do

not exert too much pressure on the bulb

with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the mirror glass

1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

Bulb specifications

Lighting func-

tion

Wat-

tage

Bulb

Extra high beam

(models with

Active Bending

Lights*)

55 H7 LL

Low beam (hal-

ogen)

55 H11 LL

High beam (hal-

ogen)

65 H9

Front turn sig-

nals

24 PY24W

License plate

lighting

5 C5W LL

Vanity mirror 2 W2x4.6d

type T5

Front side

marker lights

5 W3W LL

Glove compart-

ment lighting

5 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

Rear fog light 21 P21W LL

09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

342

Lighting func-

tion

Wat-

tage

Bulb

Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

Cargo area

lighting

10 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

343

Wiper blades

Service position

Wiper blades in service position

The wiper blades must be in the vertical

(service) position for replacement, washing or

to lift them away from the windshield when

e.g., removing ice or snow. To put them in

this position:

CAUTION

Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in

position before attempting to move them

to the service position.

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition

slot1 and press the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition

in mode I (see page 89 for detailed infor-

mation about the ignition modes).

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

again briefly to switch the ignition off.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering

wheel lever up and hold it for at least

1 second.

> The wipers will then move to the verti-

cal (service) position on the windshield.

The wipers can be returned to the normal

position by pressing the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in

mode I (or by starting the engine).

CAUTION

If the wiper arms have been folded out

from the windshield while in the service

position, fold them back against the wind-

shield before returning the wipers to the

normal position to help avoid scratching

the paint on the hood.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

NOTE

The windshield wiper blades are different

lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is

longer than the one on the passenger side.

1Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

344

With the wipers in the service position,

fold out the wiper arm from the wind-

shield. Press the button on the wiper

blade attachment and pull the wiper

blade straight out, parallel with the wiper

arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks

into place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the wind-

shield.

To return the wipers from the service position

to the normal position, fold the wipers back

against the windshield and press the START/

STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the igni-

tion in mode I (or start the engine).

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades

clean helps improve visibility and prolongs

the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the

wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and

lukewarm soap solution or car washing deter-

gent.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at

the arrow).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the

wiper arm.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and

check that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail-

gate window.

Filling washer fluid

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share

a common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on the

driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-

ing cold weather, the reservoir should be

09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

345

filled with windshield washer solvent contain-

ing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 372.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

346

Warning symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open

flames, and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner. Con-

sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery

to a recycling station.

Handling

•Check that the battery cables are cor-

rectly connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (for example, when

replacing the battery).

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as the number of starts, driv-

ing conditions and climate. Extreme cold

may also further decrease the battery’s

starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven

for an extended period of time or if the

vehicle is usually only driven short dis-

tances.

•Never use a quick charger to charge the

battery.

CAUTION

The infotainment system's energy-saving

feature may not function correctly or at all,

and/or a message may be displayed if a

battery charger or jumper cables are not

connected properly.

•The negative terminal on the battery

must never be used to connect a

jumper cable or a battery charger.

Only the ground point on the chassis

may be used.

See page 126 for an illustration and addi-

tional information.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

347

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open

flame or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If

contact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medi-

cal help immediately if eyes are affec-

ted.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

Maintenance

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the

battery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over

each battery cell or the cover is securely

in place.

•Check that the battery cables are cor-

rectly connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in

the ignition. This could damage the vehi-

cle's electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from

the vehicle when a battery charger is

used directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condi-

tion, the vehicle should be driven for at

least 15 minutes a week or connected to

a charger with an automatic charging

function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

Keeping the battery fully charged helps

prolong its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven

for an extended period of time or if the

vehicle is usually only driven short dis-

tances.

CAUTION

•Always use distilled or deionized water

(battery water).

•Never fill above the level mark in the

cell.

Changing

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

348

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and

negative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal

Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key

from the ignition slot and wait at least

5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so

that all information in the vehicle's electrical

system can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber molding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the

battery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat-

tery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Be sure that it is correctly connected

to the battery and the vent in the vehi-

cle's body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

349

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

350

Replacing fuses

There are relay/fuse boxes located in the

engine compartment, the passenger com-

partment, and the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function,

this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest

way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is diffi-

cult to remove, a special fuse removal

tool is located on the inside of the engine

compartment fuse box cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metal

wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the

fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electri-

cal system inspected by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with

higher amperage than those stated on the

following pages. Doing so could seriously

damage or overload the vehicle's electrical

system.

Location of the fuse boxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

}}

351

Engine compartment

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in are located under

A decal on the inside of the cover shows the

positions of the fuses.

NOTE

•Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be

changed at any time when necessary.

•Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are

relays/circuit breakers and should only

be removed or replaced by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

•There is a special fuse removal tool on

the underside of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 50

Circuit breaker 60

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker 60

–

Headlight washers* 20

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system blower 40

–

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

–

Active Bending Lights-head-

light leveling*

Central electrical module 20

ABS 5

Pos Function A

Speed-dependent steering

force*

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transmission, SRS

Heated washer nozzles* 10

Lighting panel 5

Engine compartment box 5

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module (ECM) 10

Control module, automatic

transmission

Compressor A/C 15

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

}}

353

Pos Function A

Relay coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module 10

Injection system, mass air

meter, engine control module

A/C compressor, engine

valves, engine control mod-

ule (6-cyl.), solenoids (6-cyl.

non-turbo only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen

sensor

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

Cooling fan 80

Electro-hydraulic power

steering

100

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

354

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse

boxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

A decal on the inside of the cover shows the

positions of the fuses.

Positions: fuse box A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker for the info-

tainment system and for fuses

16-20,

Pos Function A

12-volt socket (cargo area) 15

Controls in driver's door 20

Controls in front passenger's

door

Controls in right rear pas-

senger's door

Controls in left rear passeng-

er's door

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355

Pos Function A

Keyless drive* 20

Power driver's seat* 20

Power front passenger's seat* 20

Windshield washers

Tailgate window washer

Infotainment control module 5

Infotainment system, Sir-

iusXM™ satellite radio*

Infotainment system 15

Bluetooth hands-free system 5

Rear Seat Entertainment sys-

tem (RSE)*

7.5

Laminated panoramic roof*

Courtesy lighting, climate sys-

tem sensor

12-volt sockets 15

Heated rear seat* (passeng-

er's side)

Pos Function A

Heated rear seat* (driver's

side)

Heated front passenger's

seat*

Heated driver's seat* 15

Park assist*, trailer hitch con-

trol module*, park assist cam-

era*

All Wheel Drive* control mod-

ule

Active chassis system* 10

Positions: fuse box B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

Front courtesy lighting, driv-

er's door power window con-

trols, power seat(s)*, Home-

LInk® Wireless Control Sys-

tem*

7.5

Pos Function A

Instrument panel 5

Adaptive cruise control/colli-

sion warning*

Courtesy lighting, rain sensor* 7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler door 10

Electrically heated steering

wheel*

Electrically heated windshield* 15

Tailgate unlock 10

Electrical folding rear seat

outboard head restraints*

Fuel pump 20

Climate system control panel 5

Alarm, On-board diagnostic

system

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Airbag system, occupant

weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal, auto-dim

mirror function, heated rear

seats*

7.5

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos Rear fuse box A

Electric parking brake (left

side)

Electric parking brake (right

side)

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Pos Rear fuse box A

Power tailgate* 30

Pos Rear fuse box A

Trailer socket 1* 40

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos Rear fuse box A

Electric parking brake (left

side)

Electric parking brake (right

side)

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Pos Rear fuse box A

Power tailgate* 30

Pos Rear fuse box A

Trailer socket 1* 40

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

359

Washing the car

The following points should be kept in mind

when washing and cleaning the car:

•The car should be washed at regular

intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar

spots adhere to the paint and may cause

damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is

particularly important to wash the car fre-

quently in the wintertime.

•Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.

Doing so may cause detergents and wax

to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid

scratching, use lukewarm water to soften

the dirt before you wash with a soft

sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork

as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish

may be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

•Dry the car with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar

remover after the car has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper

blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-

shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong the

service life of the wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside

(wheel housings, fenders, etc).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more

frequent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to

remove dirt from the drain holes in the

doors and sills.

CAUTION

•During high pressure washing, the

spray mouthpiece must never be

closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm).

Do not spray into the locks.

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for

example when refueling.

Special laminated panoramic roof cau-

tions:

•Always close the laminated panoramic

roof and sun shade before washing

your vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the laminated panoramic roof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the laminated panoramic roof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special clean-

ing products, available at your Volvo retailer,

for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna-

mental components such as chromed strips

on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc-

tions for using these products should be fol-

lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers

should not be used.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

360

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or

rubber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

Automatic car wash

•We do NOT recommend washing your

car in an automatic wash during the first

few months (because the paint will not

have hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick

way to clean your car, but it is worth

remembering that it may not be as thor-

ough as when you yourself go over the

car with sponge and water. Keeping the

underbody clean is most important, espe-

cially in the winter. Some automatic

washers do not have facilities for washing

the underbody.

NOTE

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such

as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This

is normal and the lights are designed to

withstand moisture. Normally, condensa-

tion will dissipate after the lights have been

on for a short time.

CAUTION

•Before driving into an automatic car

wash, turn off the optional rain sensor

to avoid damaging the windshield wip-

ers.

•Make sure that side view mirrors, aux-

iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that

any antenna(s) are retracted or

removed. Otherwise there is risk of the

machine dislodging them.

•Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-

plated wheels using the same deter-

gents used for the body of the vehicle.

Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can

permanently stain chrome-plated

wheels.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes,

including the parking brake, several

times in order to remove any moisture

from the brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This

constitutes a fire risk.

Polishing and waxing

•Normally, polishing is not required during

the first year after delivery, however, wax-

ing may be beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can

be removed with kerosene or tar remover.

Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing

compound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products

contain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-

ishing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based waxes

can be purchased today. These waxes

are easy to use and produce a long-last-

ing, high-gloss finish that protects the

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

361

bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and

fading.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of

long-life or durable paint protection coat-

ings, some of which may claim to prevent

pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat-

ings have not been tested by Volvo for

compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.

Some of them may cause the clear coat to

soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by

application of paint protection coatings

may not be covered under your vehicle's

paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For

more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,

shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/

fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a

soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured

with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the

protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and

fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy

leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the

protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner

removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream

protectant restores a barrier against soil and

sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener

that should be applied after the cleaner and

protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth,

and reduces friction between leather and

other finishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four

times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-

ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,

do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry com-

pletely.

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream

on a cloth and apply a thin coating of

cream to the upholstery with light circular

movements.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and

protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

362

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gaso-

line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents

be used on the plastic or the leather

since these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the color-

ing can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-

vent can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may

stain the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering

wheel

•Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp

sponge and a neutral soap solution.

•Leather should be allowed to breath.

Never cover the steering wheel with a

plastic protector.

•Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting

and conditioning the steering wheel with

Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and

Leather Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or

blood)

–Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the

wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia.

For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)

of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and

wipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb-

ent paper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam-

age the leather on the steering wheel.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild

soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or

brushed clean regularly, especially during

winter when they should be taken out for dry-

ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed

with a mild detergent. For best protection in

winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo

rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components should

be done with a cleaning agent specially

designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

363

Touching up paintwork

Paint code on the model plate1

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin-

ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.

Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and

skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any

extensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using

Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The color

code number is stated on the model plate.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the

bare metal and an undamaged color coat

remains, you can add paint immediately after

removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that

any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it

with a small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint

can be applied using a brush. Mix the

paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint

coats and let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want

to protect surrounding paint by masking it

off

5. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of polish.

1see page 366 for the location of the model plate.

364

Label information.................................................................................. 366

Specifications........................................................................................ 368

Overview of information and warning symbols..................................... 374

Volvo programs..................................................................................... 377

SPECIFICATIONS

10 Specifications

Label information

366

Location of labels

10 Specifications

Label information

367

List of labels

Model

plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The

model plate is located on the rear side of

the B-pillar (the pillar between the front

and rear passenger doors) and the rear

passenger's door must be open in order

to see it.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-

ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and

Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand-

ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to

meet all applicable safety standards, as

evidenced by the certification label on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear

of the driver's door opening). For further

information regarding these regulations,

please consult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation

pressures. This label indicates the cor-

rect inflation pressures for the tires that

were on the vehicle when it left the fac-

tory. Canadian models have the upper

decal; U.S. models have the lower one.

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top

left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) should always

be quoted in all correspondence concern-

ing your vehicle with the retailer and when

ordering parts.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-

cable emission standards, as evidenced

by the certification label on the underside

of the hood. For further information regar-

ding these regulations, please consult

your Volvo retailer.

10 Specifications

Specifications

368

Dimensions

Dimension In (mm)

A Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

B Length 182.8 (4644)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

D Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

E Height 67.4 (1713)

F Load height 31.6 (802)

G Track, front 64.3 (1632)

10 Specifications

Specifications

}}

369

Dimension In (mm)

H Track, rear 62.4 (1586)

I Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

J Width 74.4 (1891)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891)

Weights

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs

6-cyl. AWDB: 5355 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg

6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs

6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg

6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg

Curb weight 3890 - 4170 lbs 1760 - 1900 kg

10 Specifications

Specifications

370

Category USA Canada

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

AFWD = Front Wheel Drive

BAWD = All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2

10 Specifications

Specifications

371

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1

AThis engine may not be available on all markets

Oil specifications

Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum

ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils

may not offer the same fuel economy, engine

performance, or engine protection.

Refer to the warranty and Service Records

information booklet for information on oil

change intervals and oil type requirements.

NOTE

This vehicle comes from the factory with

synthetic oil.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection.

See the viscosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-

ments is recommended for driving in areas

with sustained low temperatures.

10 Specifications

Specifications

372

Oil volume

Engine model Volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilAAutomatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see pack-

aging.

3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C)

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)

Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water.

Fuel tank volume 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

AUnder normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

BModels without headlight washers

10 Specifications

Specifications

373

Electrical system

General information

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-

nator. Single pole system in which the chas-

sis and engine block are used as conductors.

The negative terminal is connected to the

chassis.

Performance, battery

Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a

battery of the same cold start capacity and

reserve capacity as the original (see the

decal on the battery).

10  Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols 
10
374 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Introduction
The symbols in the vehicle's various displays
are divided into three main categories:
•Warning symbols
•Indicator symbols
•Information symbols
The following tables list the most common
symbols, their meaning and the pages in this
manual that provide more detailed informa-
tion.
NOTE
Not all of the symbols shown in the follow-
ing tables are available in all models or on
all markets. Local variations may occur.
Warning symbol
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
Information symbol
: The information symbol illuminates
and a text message is displayed to provide
the driver with necessary information about
one of the vehicle's systems.
Symbols in the main instrument panel
Warning symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description Pg.
no.
Low oil pressure 84
Parking brake 84
SRS airbags 84
Seat belt reminder 84
Generator not charging 84
Fault in the brake system 84
Warning symbol 85
Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description Pg.
no.
Fault in the Active Bend-
ing Light (ABL)*system
82
Malfunction indicator
light
82
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS)
83
Rear fog lights on 83
Stability system (DSTC),
Hill Descent Control,
Trailer Stability Assist*
83
Tire pressure monitoring
sensor (TPMS)
83
Low fuel level 83
Information symbol, see
text in information dis-
play
83
High beam indicator 80

10  Specifications
 Overview of information and warning symbols
10
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 375
Symbol Description Pg.
no.
Left turn signal indicator 80
Right turn signal indica-
tor
80
Stability system , Sport
mode
142
Information symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description Pg. no.
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
149
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
149
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
149
Adaptive Cruise
Control * (Distance
alert)
149
Radar sensor* 156
Symbol Description Pg. no.
Camera sensor,
laser sensor
173166
Collision Warning
with Full Auto-brake
and Pedestrian
Detection*
175
Active Bending
Lights (ABL)*
102
Driver Alert System* 177
Driver Alert System* 177
Parking brake 137
Rain sensor* 107
Active High Beams
(AHB)*
100
Windshield sensor* 100
Symbol Description Pg. no.
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning)
180
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning)
180
Driver Alert System*
(Lane Departure
Warning)
180
Fuel tank on pas-
senger's side of the
vehicle
280
Information symbols in the center
console display
Symbol Description Pg.
no.
Audio files 250
CD folder 250
Video files 250
Bluetooth-connected
cell phone
260

10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

376 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Description Pg.

no.

BluetoothTM hands-free 260

HD radio 242

Park Assist* 183

Information symbols in the ceiling

console

Symbol Description Pg.

no.

Seat belt reminder 19

Occupant Weight Sensor 26

10 Specifications

Volvo programs

377

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance. Additional infor-

mation, features, and benefits are described

in a separate information package in your

glove compartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo

supports certification by the National Institute

for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).

Certified technicians have demonstrated a

high degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician

must also have worked in the field for two or

more years before a certificate is issued.

These professional technicians are best able

to analyze vehicle problems and perform the

necessary maintenance procedures to keep

your Volvo at peak operating condition.

11 Index
11
378
1, 2, 3 ...
12-volt sockets........................................ 226
A
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 135
Accessory installation warning.................. 13
Active chassis system............................. 223
Active high beams................................... 100
Active yaw control................................... 142
Adaptive brake lights............................... 134
Adaptive cruise control.................... 149, 151
queue assist........................................ 154
Airbags
disconnecting the front passenger’s
side................................................. 26, 27
front...................................................... 22
inflatable curtain................................... 32
side impact........................................... 30
Air conditioning........................................ 212
Air distribution.......................................... 208
Air distribution table................................. 215
Air vents................................................... 209
All Wheel Drive......................................... 131
Ambient temperature sensor..................... 86
Anti-freeze....................................... 276, 334
Anti-lock brake system
warning light................................... 81, 83
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 135
Approach lighting.............................. 61, 106
Audio system
AUX/USB sockets............................... 254
Bluetooth® devices............................. 257
Bluetooth® hands-free system........... 259
Bluetooth streaming audio................. 257
getting started.................................... 231
HD digital radio................................... 242
introduction......................................... 230
media player....................................... 249
overview.............................................. 230
radio functions.................................... 240
SiriusXM™ satellite radio.................... 244
sound settings.................................... 235
steering wheel keypad........................ 231
voice control....................................... 268
Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 113
Automatic locking retractor....................... 39
Automatic transmission
Geartronic........................................... 129
general description..................... 128, 129
oil........................................................ 372
shiftlock override................................ 131
Axle weight.............................................. 307
B
Battery
changing..................................... 347, 348
maintenance....................................... 347
remote key, replacing........................... 64
specifications...................................... 373
warning symbols................................. 346
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 191
Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 259
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 51
Booster cushions....................................... 47
Brake lights.............................................. 134
Brake system
ABS..................................................... 135
Brake pad inspection.......................... 134
checking fluid level............................. 334
emergency brake assistance.............. 135

11 Index
11
379
fluid..................................................... 372
general information............................. 134
Bulbs
cargo area lighting.............................. 341
headlights........................... 336, 337, 338
introduction......................................... 336
license plate lights...................... 340, 341
specifications...................................... 341
taillight................................................ 340
C
Camera, Park Assist................................ 187
Capacity weight....................................... 307
Cargo area
changing bulbs................................... 341
steel grid............................................. 287
Cargo area cover..................................... 287
Cargo area net......................................... 288
Catalytic converter................................... 281
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 259
Cell phone voice control.......................... 268
Central locking system, introduction......... 58
Chains...................................................... 310
Check engine light..................................... 81
Check Engine warning light....................... 82
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 40
Child restraint systems.............................. 41
booster cushions.................................. 47
convertible seats.................................. 45
infant seats........................................... 43
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 48
top tether anchors................................ 50
Child safety................................................ 38
booster cushions.................................. 47
child restraint systems.......................... 41
convertible seats.................................. 45
infant seats........................................... 43
Child safety locks...................................... 54
City Safety™............................................ 163
Climate system........................................ 213
air distribution............................. 208, 215
air vents.............................................. 209
Interior Air Quality System.................. 208
introduction......................................... 207
passenger compartment filter............ 208
refrigerant........................................... 207
Clock, setting............................................. 87
Cold weather driving................................ 276
Collision warning system................. 169, 170
Compass in rearview mirror..................... 115
Conserving electrical current................... 276
Controls, center console.......................... 231
Convertible seats....................................... 45
Coolant............................................ 334, 372
Cooling system, general information....... 275
Corner Traction Control........................... 142
Courtesy lighting.............................. 104, 105
Crash event data......................................... 9
Crash mode............................................... 36
Cruise control.................................. 147, 148
adaptive.............................................. 149
Curb weight............................................. 307
Current, conserving................................. 276
D
Daytime running lights............................... 99
Defroster.................................................. 213
Detachable key blade................................ 64
Dimensions.............................................. 368

11 Index
11
380
Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-
bag....................................................... 26, 27
Dome lighting................................... 104, 105
Door mirrors............................................. 112
Driver alert............................................... 177
Driver distraction warning.......................... 13
Driving economically................................ 274
Driving in cold weather............................ 276
Driving through water.............................. 275
E
ECC................................................. 212, 214
Eco guide................................................. 132
Economical driving.................................. 274
Electrically heated steering wheel............. 98
Electric parking brake.............................. 137
Electronic Climate Control....... 210, 212, 214
air distribution table............................ 215
Interior Air Quality System.................. 214
Emergency locking retractor...................... 39
Emergency starting.................................. 126
Emergency towing................................... 293
Emission inspection readiness................ 329
Engine
overheating........................................... 84
specifications...................................... 370
starting................................................ 123
switching off....................................... 126
Engine compartment overview................ 331
Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 142
Engine oil................................................. 371
checking............................................. 332
low pressure warning light.................... 83
volumes.............................................. 372
Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 125
Environment............................................... 12
Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 285
F
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 328
Flat tires
repairing with tire sealing system....... 312
Floor mats
cleaning.............................................. 362
placing correctly................................. 123
Fluid specifications.................................. 372
Fog lights................................................... 83
rear.............................................. 103, 339
Four C (active chassis system)................ 223
Front airbags.............................................. 22
disconnecting passenger’s side air-
bag.................................................. 26, 27
Front park assist.............................. 183, 185
Front seats........................................... 90, 92
Fuel filler cap........................................... 281
Fuel filler door, opening........................... 280
Fuel level warning light.............................. 83
Fuel requirements............................ 278, 279
Fuel tank volume..................................... 372
Fuses....................... 350, 351, 354, 357, 358
G
Garage door opener
HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 120
Gasoline requirements............................. 279
Gas tank volume...................................... 372
Gauges...................................................... 79
Geartronic................................................ 129

11 Index
11
381
Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 129
Generator warning light............................. 84
Glossary of tire terminology..................... 306
Grocery bag holder.................................. 285
Gross vehicle weight............................... 307
H
Hazard warning flashers.......................... 104
HD digital radio........................................ 242
Headlights
Active Bending Lights......................... 102
active high beams............................... 100
changing bulbs........................... 337, 338
daytime running lights.......................... 99
high/low beams.................................. 100
high beam flash.................................. 100
tunnel detection.................................. 102
Headlight washers................................... 108
Head restraints, rear seat.................... 93, 94
Heated oxygen sensors........................... 282
Heated rear seats.................................... 211
Heated steering wheel............................... 98
Heated windshield........................... 113, 213
High beams.............................................. 100
active.................................................. 100
Hill Start Assist (HSA).............................. 128
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 329
HomeLink® Wireless Control System...... 120
Home safe lighting................................... 105
Hood, opening/closing............................ 331
Horn........................................................... 97
I
Ignition modes........................................... 88
Immobilizer................................................ 60
Important information.................................. 6
Indicator lights............................... 79, 81, 83
Infant seats................................................ 43
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 32
Inflation pressure..................................... 301
Inflation pressure table............................ 303
Information and warning symbols, table
of.............................................................. 374
Information lights........................... 79, 81, 83
Infotainment
Menu navigation................................. 233
Infotainment system................................ 230
AUX/USB sockets............................... 254
Bluetooth® devices............................. 257
Bluetooth® hands-free system........... 259
getting started.................................... 231
media player....................................... 249
menus......................................... 231, 233
radio functions.................................... 240
sound settings.................................... 235
voice control....................................... 268
Inspection readiness................................ 329
Instrument lighting................................... 102
"theater" lighting................................. 102
Instrument overview............................ 78, 79
Instrument panel................................ 79, 199
Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 51
Interior Air Quality System....................... 208
Interior lighting................................. 104, 105
iPod® connector (audio system)............. 254
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 48

11 Index
11
382
J
Jack
attaching............................................. 318
location of........................................... 318
Jump starting........................................... 126
K
Key blade....................................... 58, 64, 67
Keyless drive
general description............................... 67
starting the vehicle............................. 123
L
Labels
list of................................................... 367
location of........................................... 366
Laminated panoramic roof...................... 117
LATCH anchors......................................... 48
Leather care............................................. 361
Lighting panel............................................ 99
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 285
Loading the vehicle.......................... 283, 307
roof loads............................................ 286
Locking...................................................... 70
tailgate.................................................. 71
Locking the vehicle.................................... 61
Locks, child safety..................................... 54
Low beams.............................................. 100
Low oil pressure warning light................... 83
M
Main instrument panel............................. 199
Maintenance............................................ 328
hoisting the vehicle............................. 329
performed by the owner..................... 329
Malfunction indicator light......................... 82
Media player (infotainment system)......... 249
Menu........................................................ 201
Messages in the instrument panel........... 199
Mirrors
defroster............................................. 113
power door......................................... 112
rearview, auto-dim function................ 113
retractable........................................... 112
vanity.................................................. 226
Motor oil
checking............................................. 332
volumes.............................................. 372
MY CAR................................................... 201
N
Net in cargo area..................................... 288
O
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Occupant weight sensor...................... 26, 27
Octane recommendations....................... 279
Odometer, trip........................................... 86
Oil
checking............................................. 332
volumes.............................................. 372
Oil quality................................................. 371
OK button................................................ 199
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 377

11 Index
11
383
Outside temperature sensor...................... 86
Overhead courtesy lighting.............. 104, 105
Overheating, engine................................... 84
Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 282
P
Paint, touching up.................................... 363
Park assist....................................... 183, 185
Park Assist Camera................................. 187
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing................. 137
warning light......................................... 83
Parking lights........................................... 103
Personal Car Communicator, unique
functions.................................................... 62
Polishing.................................................. 360
Power front seat
memory function................................... 91
with keyless drive................................. 92
Power meter............................................ 132
Power mirrors.......................................... 112
defroster............................................. 113
Power steering
fluid..................................................... 335
speed-dependent............................... 223
Power steering fluid................................. 372
Power tailgate.......................................... 283
Power windows....................................... 110
laminated glass................................... 111
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 126, 348, 373
R
Radio
SiriusXM™ satellite radio.................... 244
Radio functions........................................ 240
HD digital radio................................... 242
Rain sensor.............................................. 107
Rear fog lights.................................. 103, 339
Rear park assist............................... 183, 185
Rear seat head restraints........................... 94
Rear seats
center head restraint............................. 93
folding................................................... 93
heated................................................. 211
Rearview mirror
auto-dim function............................... 113
compass............................................. 115
Rear window defroster............................ 113
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 40
Refrigerant............................................... 372
Refueling.......................................... 278, 279
fuel filler cap....................................... 281
fuel filler door...................................... 280
fuel tank volume................................. 372
Registering child restraints........................ 40
Remote key................................................ 58
approach lighting.................................. 61
immobilizer........................................... 60
key blade........................................ 58, 64
locking the vehicle................................ 61
Personal Car Communicator.......... 61, 62
replacing the battery............................. 64
unlocking the vehicle............................ 61
Remote key/PCC
common functions................................ 61
Reporting safety defects............................ 17
Roadside Assistance............................... 377
Road sign information (RSI)..................... 145
Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 35

11 Index
11
384
Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 35
Roof loads............................................... 286
S
Safety, occupant........................................ 16
Safety defects, reporting........................... 17
Seat belt
reminder................................................ 19
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
gency locking retractor......................... 39
buckling................................................ 18
maintenance......................................... 18
pretensioners........................................ 18
reminder................................................ 18
reminder warning light.......................... 84
securing child restraint
systems.................................... 43, 45, 47
unbuckling............................................ 18
use during pregnancy........................... 20
using..................................................... 18
Seats, front.......................................... 90, 91
Sensus..................................................... 198
Shiftlock....................................................... 9
override............................................... 131
Side door mirrors..................................... 112
Side impact airbags................................... 30
Sign information (RSI).............................. 145
SiriusXM™ satellite radio......................... 244
Snow chains............................................ 310
Snow tires................................................ 310
Spare tire................................................. 311
Speed-dependent steering...................... 223
Spin control............................................. 142
SRS............................................................ 21
Stability system............................... 142, 143
Corner Traction Control (CTC)............ 142
Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 142
indicator light........................................ 83
Starting the engine.................................. 123
remote start........................................ 125
with keyless drive............................... 123
Starting the vehicle
after a crash (crash mode).................... 36
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 60
Steel grid in cargo area............................ 287
Steering wheel
adjusting............................................... 97
heated................................................... 98
horn....................................................... 97
keypad.................................. 97, 201, 231
Steering wheel paddles............................. 97
Stone chips, touching up......................... 363
Storage spaces........................................ 224
Studded tires........................................... 310
Sunroof
laminated panoramic roof................... 117
Sun shade................................................ 110
Supplemental restraint system.................. 21
warning light......................................... 84
Symbols, overview................................... 374
T
Tailgate
driving with it open............................. 274
locking/unlocking.................................. 71
opening manually................................. 72
power operated.................................. 283
wiper/washer...................................... 108
Tailgate wipers......................................... 344

11 Index
11
385
Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 340
Temperature sensor
ambient................................................. 86
Temporary spare tire............................... 311
Three-way catalytic converter................. 281
Tire designations..................................... 304
Tire inflation pressure.............................. 303
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 322, 323
indicator light........................................ 83
Tires......................................................... 298
age...................................................... 298
changing from summer to winter........ 299
glossary of terms................................ 306
improving economy............................ 299
inflation pressure................................ 301
inflation pressure table....................... 303
load ratings......................................... 302
rotation............................................... 298
Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 324
snow................................................... 310
spare................................................... 311
specifications...................................... 302
speed ratings...................................... 302
storing................................................. 300
studded............................................... 310
tire pressure monitoring system......... 322
tire sealing system.............................. 312
tread wear indicator............................ 299
uniform tire quality grading................. 309
Tire sealing system.................................. 312
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems).......................................................... 50
Touching up paint.................................... 363
Towing a trailer................................ 290, 291
trailer hitch.......................................... 291
Towing the vehicle................................... 293
Traction control........................................ 142
Trailer towing................................... 290, 291
trailer hitch.......................................... 291
Transmission
general description..................... 128, 129
Hill Start Assist................................... 128
oil........................................................ 372
shiftlock override................................ 131
Tread wear indicator................................ 299
Trip computer.......................................... 216
Trip odometers.......................................... 86
Trips, long distance................................. 276
Tunnel detection...................................... 102
Turn signals............................................. 104
indicator lights...................................... 83
Two-stage booster cushion....................... 51
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 309
Unlocking the tailgate................................ 71
Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 61, 70
Upholstery care....................................... 361
V
Vanity mirror............................................ 226
changing bulbs................................... 341
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 368
Vehicle Event Data....................................... 9
Vehicle loading................................ 283, 307
roof loads............................................ 286
Vehicle maintenance................................ 328
performed by the owner..................... 329
Vehicle weights........................................ 369
Voice control
cell phones......................................... 268
Volvo and the environment........................ 12

11 Index
11
386
Volvo maintenance.................................. 328
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 377
Volvo programs....................................... 377
Volvo Sensus........................................... 198
W
Warning flashers, hazard......................... 104
Warning lights................................ 79, 81, 83
Warning symbol......................................... 85
Warning system, collision................ 169, 170
Warranties................................................ 328
Washer fluid..................................... 344, 372
Washers
headlight............................................. 108
windshield........................................... 107
Water, driving through............................. 275
Waxing..................................................... 360
Weights.................................................... 369
Wheels..................................................... 298
changing............................................. 318
storing................................................. 300
Whiplash Protection System..................... 33
Windows
power.................................................. 110
sun shade........................................... 110
Windshield
heated......................................... 113, 213
rain sensor.......................................... 107
washers.............................................. 108
wipers/washers................................... 107
Windshield washer fluid................... 344, 372
Windshield wipers.................................... 343
service position................................... 343
Wiper blades
replacing............................................. 343
replacing tailgate wiper...................... 344

Volvo 2014 XC60 Owner's Manual Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation